ZyXEL Communications NBG6503 Simultaneous Dual-Band Wireless AC750 Home Router User Manual Book

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	1976843
Application ID	QfdVheyFmRN3mZ/HR56eKA==
Document Description	user manual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	269.15kB (3364350 bits)
Date Submitted	2013-05-29 00:00:00
Date Available	2013-05-29 00:00:00
Creation Date	2017-10-27 07:02:09
Producing Software	GPL Ghostscript 9.18
Document Lastmod	2017-10-27 07:02:09
Document Title	Book.book
Document Creator	FrameMaker 9.0
Document Author:	ZT01650

N BG6 5 0 3
Sim ult aneous Dual- band Wireless AC750 Hom e Rout er
Version 1.00
Edit ion 1, 04/ 2013
Quick Start Guide
Use r ’s Gu ide
D e fa u lt D e t a ils
LAN I P Address
- Rout er Mode
ht t p: / / 192.168.1.1
( Default
m ode)
www.zyxel.com
- AP Mode
ht t p: / / 192.168.1.2
User Nam e
adm in
Password
1234
SSI D
ZyXEL
Pre- shared Key
00000000
Copyright © 2013 ZyXEL Com m unicat ions Corporat ion
IMPORTANT!
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.
KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
Related Documentation
• Quick St art Guide
The Quick St art Guide shows how t o connect t he NBG6503 and access t he Web Configurat or
wizards. I t also cont ains a connect ion diagram and package cont ent s list .
Not e: I t is recom m ended you use t he Web Configurat or t o configure t he NBG6503.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Contents Overview
Contents Overview
User’s Guide .......................................................................................................................................13
Getting to Know Your Router ..................................................................................................................15
Connection Wizard ..................................................................................................................................21
Introducing the Web Configurator ...........................................................................................................31
Monitor ....................................................................................................................................................37
Router Modes ..........................................................................................................................................43
Easy Mode ..............................................................................................................................................45
Router Mode ...........................................................................................................................................57
Access Point Mode .................................................................................................................................65
Tutorials ..................................................................................................................................................73
Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................81
Wireless LAN ..........................................................................................................................................83
WAN ........................................................................................................................................................99
LAN .......................................................................................................................................................109
DHCP Server ........................................................................................................................................ 113
Network Address Translation (NAT) ...................................................................................................... 117
Dynamic DNS ........................................................................................................................................123
Static Route ...........................................................................................................................................125
Firewall ..................................................................................................................................................129
Content Filter .........................................................................................................................................133
Bandwidth Management .......................................................................................................................137
Remote Management ............................................................................................................................145
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) ...........................................................................................................147
Maintenance ..........................................................................................................................................155
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................165
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Contents Overview
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Contents Overview ..............................................................................................................................3
Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................5
Part I: User’s Guide ......................................................................................... 13
Chapter 1
Getting to Know Your Router.............................................................................................................15
1.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................15
1.2 Applications .......................................................................................................................................15
1.3 Ways to Manage the Router .............................................................................................................15
1.4 Good Habits for Managing the Router ..............................................................................................16
1.5 LEDs .................................................................................................................................................17
1.6 The WPS Button ...............................................................................................................................18
1.7 Wall Mounting ...................................................................................................................................18
Chapter 2
Connection Wizard .............................................................................................................................21
2.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................21
2.2 Accessing the Wizard ........................................................................................................................21
2.3 Connect to Internet ............................................................................................................................22
2.3.1 Connection Type: DHCP .........................................................................................................23
2.3.2 Connection Type: Static IP ......................................................................................................23
2.3.3 Connection Type: PPPoE ........................................................................................................24
2.3.4 Connection Type: PPTP ..........................................................................................................25
2.4 Router Password ...............................................................................................................................27
2.5 Wireless Security ..............................................................................................................................27
2.5.1 Wireless Security: No Security ................................................................................................27
2.5.2 Wireless Security: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK ...............................................................................28
Chapter 3
Introducing the Web Configurator ....................................................................................................31
3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................31
3.2 Accessing the Web Configurator .......................................................................................................31
3.2.1 Login Screen ...........................................................................................................................31
3.2.2 Password Screen ....................................................................................................................32
3.2.3 Home Screen ...........................................................................................................................33
3.3 Resetting the Router .........................................................................................................................35
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
3.3.1 Procedure to Use the Reset Button .........................................................................................35
Chapter 4
Monitor.................................................................................................................................................37
4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................37
4.2 What You Can Do .............................................................................................................................37
4.3 The Log Screen .................................................................................................................................37
4.3.1 View Log ..................................................................................................................................37
4.4 BW MGMT Monitor ...........................................................................................................................39
4.5 DHCP Table
...................................................................................................................................39
4.6 Packet Statistics ...............................................................................................................................40
4.7 WLAN 2.4G Station Status
4.8 WLAN 5G Station Status
............................................................................................................41
...............................................................................................................41
Chapter 5
Router Modes......................................................................................................................................43
5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................43
5.1.1 Web Configurator Modes .........................................................................................................43
5.1.2 Device Modes ..........................................................................................................................43
Chapter 6
Easy Mode ...........................................................................................................................................45
6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................45
6.2 What You Can Do .............................................................................................................................47
6.3 What You Need to Know ...................................................................................................................47
6.4 Navigation Panel ...............................................................................................................................47
6.5 Network Map .....................................................................................................................................47
6.6 Control Panel ....................................................................................................................................48
6.6.1 Game Engine ...........................................................................................................................49
6.6.2 Power Saving ..........................................................................................................................50
6.6.3 Content Filter ...........................................................................................................................51
6.6.4 Bandwidth MGMT ....................................................................................................................51
6.6.5 Firewall ....................................................................................................................................52
6.6.6 Wireless Security .....................................................................................................................52
6.6.7 WPS ........................................................................................................................................54
6.7 Status Screen in Easy Mode .............................................................................................................55
Chapter 7
Router Mode........................................................................................................................................57
7.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................57
7.2 What You Can Do .............................................................................................................................57
7.3 Status Screen ....................................................................................................................................58
7.3.1 Navigation Panel .....................................................................................................................61
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Chapter 8
Access Point Mode.............................................................................................................................65
8.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................65
8.2 What You Can Do .............................................................................................................................65
8.3 What You Need to Know ...................................................................................................................65
8.3.1 Setting your Router to AP Mode ..............................................................................................66
8.3.2 Accessing the Web Configurator in Access Point Mode ..........................................................66
8.3.3 Configuring your WLAN, Bandwidth Management and Maintenance Settings ........................67
8.4 AP Mode Status Screen ....................................................................................................................68
8.5 LAN Screen .......................................................................................................................................70
Chapter 9
Tutorials ...............................................................................................................................................73
9.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................73
9.2 Connecting to the Internet from an Access Point ..............................................................................73
9.3 Configuring Wireless Security Using WPS ........................................................................................73
9.3.1 Push Button Configuration (PBC) ............................................................................................74
9.3.2 PIN Configuration ....................................................................................................................75
9.4 Enabling and Configuring Wireless Security (No WPS) ....................................................................77
9.4.1 Configure Your Notebook ........................................................................................................78
Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................ 81
Chapter 10
Wireless LAN.......................................................................................................................................83
10.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................83
10.2 What You Can Do ...........................................................................................................................83
10.3 What You Should Know ..................................................................................................................84
10.3.1 Wireless Security Overview ...................................................................................................84
10.4 General Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G Screen .........................................................................................86
10.4.1 No Security ............................................................................................................................87
10.4.2 WEP Encryption ....................................................................................................................88
10.4.3 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK ...........................................................................................................90
10.5 MAC Filter .......................................................................................................................................90
10.6 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen .....................................................................................................91
10.7 Quality of Service (QoS) Screen .....................................................................................................93
10.8 WPS Screen ....................................................................................................................................94
10.9 WPS Station Screen ........................................................................................................................95
10.10 Scheduling Screen ........................................................................................................................96
10.11 WDS Screen ..................................................................................................................................97
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Chapter 11
WAN .....................................................................................................................................................99
11.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................99
11.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................................99
11.3 What You Need To Know .................................................................................................................99
11.3.1 Configuring Your Internet Connection ..................................................................................100
11.3.2 Multicast ...............................................................................................................................101
11.4 Internet Connection .......................................................................................................................102
11.4.1 Ethernet Encapsulation ........................................................................................................102
11.4.2 PPPoE Encapsulation ..........................................................................................................103
11.4.3 PPTP Encapsulation ............................................................................................................105
11.5 Advanced WAN Screen .................................................................................................................108
Chapter 12
LAN ....................................................................................................................................................109
12.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................109
12.2 What You Can Do .........................................................................................................................109
12.3 What You Need To Know .............................................................................................................. 110
12.3.1 IP Pool Setup ....................................................................................................................... 110
12.3.2 LAN TCP/IP ......................................................................................................................... 110
12.3.3 IP Alias ................................................................................................................................ 110
12.4 LAN IP Screen .............................................................................................................................. 111
12.5 IP Alias Screen .............................................................................................................................. 111
Chapter 13
DHCP Server ..................................................................................................................................... 113
13.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 113
13.2 What You Can Do ......................................................................................................................... 113
13.3 General Screen ............................................................................................................................. 113
13.4 Advanced Screen
....................................................................................................................... 114
Chapter 14
Network Address Translation (NAT)................................................................................................ 117
14.1 Overview
.................................................................................................................................... 117
14.2 What You Can Do ......................................................................................................................... 117
14.3 General NAT Screen ..................................................................................................................... 118
14.4 NAT Application Screen
.............................................................................................................. 118
14.5 NAT Advanced Screen ..................................................................................................................120
14.5.1 Trigger Port Forwarding Example ........................................................................................122
14.5.2 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports ...................................................................122
Chapter 15
Dynamic DNS ....................................................................................................................................123
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
15.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................123
15.2 What You Can Do .........................................................................................................................123
15.3 What You Need To Know ..............................................................................................................123
15.4 Dynamic DNS Screen
.................................................................................................................123
Chapter 16
Static Route .......................................................................................................................................125
16.1 Overview
....................................................................................................................................125
16.2 What You Can Do .........................................................................................................................125
16.3 IP Static Route Screen .................................................................................................................126
Chapter 17
Firewall ..............................................................................................................................................129
17.1 Overview
.....................................................................................................................................129
17.2 What You Can Do .........................................................................................................................129
17.3 What You Need To Know ..............................................................................................................130
17.4 General Firewall Screen
.............................................................................................................130
17.5 Services Screen ...........................................................................................................................131
Chapter 18
Content Filter ....................................................................................................................................133
18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................133
18.2 What You Can Do .........................................................................................................................133
18.3 What You Need To Know ..............................................................................................................133
18.3.1 Content Filtering Profiles .....................................................................................................133
18.4 Content Filter Screen ....................................................................................................................134
Chapter 19
Bandwidth Management...................................................................................................................137
19.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................137
19.2 What You Can Do .........................................................................................................................137
19.3 What You Need To Know ..............................................................................................................138
19.4 General Screen ............................................................................................................................138
19.5 Advanced Screen .........................................................................................................................138
19.5.1 Rule Configuration: Application Rule Configuration
.........................................................141
19.5.2 Rule Configuration: User Defined Service Rule Configuration
.........................................142
19.6 Monitor Screen ..............................................................................................................................143
19.6.1 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services .....................................................................143
Chapter 20
Remote Management........................................................................................................................145
20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................145
20.2 What You Can Do .........................................................................................................................145
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
20.3 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................145
20.3.1 Remote Management and NAT ...........................................................................................145
20.3.2 System Timeout ..................................................................................................................146
20.4 WWW Screen
.............................................................................................................................146
Chapter 21
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)......................................................................................................147
21.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................147
21.2 What You Can Do .........................................................................................................................147
21.3 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................147
21.3.1 NAT Traversal ......................................................................................................................147
21.3.2 Cautions with UPnP .............................................................................................................148
21.4 UPnP Screen ...............................................................................................................................148
21.5 Technical Refereance ....................................................................................................................148
21.5.1 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example .................................................................................148
21.5.2 Web Configurator Easy Access ...........................................................................................151
Chapter 22
Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................155
22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................155
22.2 What You Can Do .........................................................................................................................155
22.3 General Screen .............................................................................................................................155
22.4 Password Screen ..........................................................................................................................156
22.5 Time Setting Screen ......................................................................................................................157
22.6 Firmware Upgrade Screen ............................................................................................................158
22.7 Configuration Backup/Restore Screen ..........................................................................................160
22.8 Restart Screen ..............................................................................................................................161
22.9 System Operation Mode Overview ...............................................................................................161
22.10 Sys OP Mode Screen ..................................................................................................................163
Chapter 23
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................165
23.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ....................................................................................165
23.2 Router Access and Login ..............................................................................................................166
23.3 Internet Access .............................................................................................................................167
23.4 Resetting the Router to Its Factory Defaults .................................................................................169
23.5 Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting ............................................................................................169
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting.......................................................................................171
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address ......................................................................181
Appendix C Wireless LANs..............................................................................................................209
Appendix D Common Services........................................................................................................223
10
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Appendix E Legal Information..........................................................................................................227
Index ..................................................................................................................................................235
NBG6503 User’s Guide
11
Table of Contents
12
NBG6503 User’s Guide
P ART I
User’s Guide
13
14
C HAPT ER
Getting to Know Your Router
1.1 Overview
This chapt er int roduces t he m ain feat ures and applicat ions of t he Rout er.
The Rout er upgrades t he speed of your exist ing wireless net work, providing fast er net work access
t o m obile users. Making use of I EEE 802.11AC t echnology, it not only upgrades your net work t o t he
next level but also elim inat es dead spot s, while offering backward com pat ibilit y wit h ot her I EEE
802.11b/ g/ n com pat ible devices.
A range of services such as a firewall and cont ent filt ering are also available for secure I nt ernet
com put ing. You can use m edia bandwidt h m anagem ent t o efficient ly m anage t raffic on your
net work. Bandwidt h m anagem ent feat ures allow you t o priorit ize t im e- sensit ive or highly im port ant
applicat ions such as Voice over t he I nt ernet ( VoI P) .
1.2 Applications
Your can creat e t he following net works using t he Rout er:
• W ir e d. You can connect net work devices via t he Et hernet port s of t he Rout er so t hat t hey can
com m unicat e wit h each ot her and access t he I nt ernet .
• W ir e le ss. Wireless client s can connect t o t he Rout er t o access net work resources.
• W AN . Connect t o a broadband m odem / rout er for I nt ernet access.
1.3 Ways to Manage the Router
Use any of t he following m et hods t o m anage t he Rout er.
• Web Configurat or. This is recom m ended for everyday m anagem ent of t he Rout er using a
( support ed) web browser.
• Wireless swit ch. You can use t he built- in swit ch of t he Rout er t o t urn t he wireless funct ion on and
off wit hout opening t he Web Configurat or.
• WPS ( Wi- Fi Prot ect ed Set up) but t on. You can use t he WPS but t on or t he WPS sect ion of t he Web
Configurat or t o set up a wireless net work wit h your Rout er.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
15
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Router
1.4 Good Habits for Managing the Router
Do t he following t hings regularly t o m ake t he Rout er m ore secure and t o m anage t he Rout er m ore
effect ively.
• Change t he password. Use a password t hat ’s not easy t o guess and t hat consist s of different
t ypes of charact ers, such as num bers and let t ers.
• Writ e down t he password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up t he configurat ion ( and m ake sure you know how t o rest ore it ) . Rest oring an earlier
working configurat ion m ay be useful if t he device becom es unst able or even crashes. I f you
forget your password, you will have t o reset t he Rout er t o it s fact ory default set t ings. I f you
backed up an earlier configurat ion file, you would not have t o t ot ally re- configure t he Rout er. You
could sim ply rest ore your last configurat ion.
16
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Router
1.5 LEDs
Figure 1 Front Panel
Power
WAN
LAN 1-4
WLAN
5GHz
WLAN WPS
2.4GHz
The following t able describes t he LEDs and t he WPS but t on.
Table 1 Front Panel LEDs and WPS But t on
LED
COLOR
STATUS
POWER
Green
On
The Rout er is receiving power and funct ioning properly.
Off
The Rout er is not receiving power.
On
The Rout er has a successful 10/ 100MB WAN connect ion.
Blinking
The Rout er is sending/ receiving dat a t hrough t he WAN.
Off
The WAN connect ion is not ready, or has failed.
On
The Rout er has a successful 10/ 100MB Et hernet connect ion.
WAN
LAN 1- 4
WLAN 5 GHz
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Green
Green
Green
DESCRIPTION
Blinking
The Rout er is sending/ receiving dat a t hrough t he LAN.
Off
The LAN is not connect ed.
On
The Rout er is ready, but is not sending/ receiving dat a t hrough
t he wireless LAN 5 GHz band.
Blinking
The Rout er is sending/ receiving dat a t hrough t he wireless LAN
5 GHz band.
Off
The wireless LAN 5 GHz band is not ready or has failed.
17
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Router
Table 1 Front Panel LEDs and WPS But t on ( cont inued)
LED
COLOR
STATUS
DESCRIPTION
WLAN 2.4 GHz
Green
On
The Rout er is ready, but is not sending/ receiving dat a t hrough
t he wireless LAN 2.4 GHz band.
Blinking
The Rout er is sending/ receiving dat a t hrough t he wireless LAN
2.4 GHz band.
Off
The wireless LAN 2.4 GHz band is not ready or has failed.
On
WPS is enabled.
Blinking
The Rout er is negot iat ing a WPS connect ion wit h a wireless
client .
Off
The wireless LAN is not ready or has failed.
WPS
Green
1.6 The WPS Button
Your Rout er support s WiFi Prot ect ed Set up ( WPS) , which is an easy way t o set up a secure wireless
net work. WPS is an indust ry st andard specificat ion, defined by t he WiFi Alliance.
WPS allows you t o quickly set up a wireless net work wit h st rong securit y, wit hout having t o
configure securit y set t ings m anually. Each WPS connect ion works bet ween t wo devices. Bot h
devices m ust support WPS ( check each device’s docum ent at ion t o m ake sure) .
Depending on t he devices you have, you can eit her press a but t on ( on t he device it self, or in it s
configurat ion ut ilit y) or ent er a PI N ( a unique Personal I dent ificat ion Num ber t hat allows one device
t o aut hent icat e t he ot her) in each of t he t wo devices. When WPS is act ivat ed on a device, it has t wo
m inut es t o find anot her device t hat also has WPS act ivat ed. Then, t he t wo devices connect and set
up a secure net work by t hem selves.
For m ore inform at ion on using WPS, see Sect ion 9.3 on page 73.
1.7 Wall Mounting
You m ay need screw anchors if m ount ing on a concret e or brick wall.
Table 2 Wall Mounting Information
Dist ance bet ween holes
11 cm
M4 Screws
Two
Screw anchors ( opt ional)
Two
Select a posit ion free of obst ruct ions on a wall st rong enough t o hold t he weight of t he
device.
Mark t w o holes on t he wall at t he appropriat e dist ance apart for t he screws.
Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall
when drilling holes for the screws.
18
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Router
I f using screw anchors, drill t wo holes for t he screw anchors int o t he wall. Push t he
anchors int o t he full dept h of t he holes, t hen insert t he screws int o t he anchors. Do not
insert t he screws all t he way in - leave a sm all gap of about 0.5 cm .
I f not using scr ew anchors, use a screwdriver t o insert t he screws int o t he wall. Do not
insert t he screws all t he way in - leave a gap of about 0.5 cm .
Make sure t he screws are fast ened w ell enough t o hold t he weight of t he Rout er wit h t he
connect ion cables.
Align t he holes on t he back of t he Rout er wit h t he scr ews on t he wall. Hang t he Rout er on
t he scr ews.
Figure 2 Wall Mounting Example
NBG6503 User’s Guide
19
C HAPT ER
Connection Wizard
2.1 Overview
This chapt er provides inform at ion on t he wizard set up screens in t he Web Configurat or.
The Web Configurat or ’s wizard set up helps you configure your device t o access t he I nt ernet . Refer
t o your I SP for your I nt ernet account inform at ion. Leave a field blank if you don’t have t hat
inform at ion.
2.2 Accessing the Wizard
Launch your web browser and t ype " ht t p: / / 192.168.1.1" as t he websit e address. Type " 1234"
( default ) as t he password and click Login .
Not e: The Wizard appears when t he Rout er is accessed for t he first t im e or when you
reset t he Rout er t o it s default fact or y set t ings.
The Wizard screen opens. Choose your La ngua ge and click Con ne ct t o I nt e r n e t .
Figure 3 Welcom e
NBG6503 User’s Guide
21
Chapter 2 Connection Wizard
2.3 Connect to Internet
The Rout er offers four I nt ernet connect ion t ypes. They are St a t ic I P, D H CP, PPPoE, or PPTP. The
wizard at t em pt s t o det ect which WAN connect ion t ype you are using.
Figure 4 Det ect ing your I nt ernet Connect ion Type
I f t he wizard does not det ect a connect ion t ype, you m ust select one from t he drop- down list box.
Check wit h your I SP t o m ake sure you use t he correct t ype.
Not e: I f you get an err or m essage, check your hardware connect ions. Make sur e your
I nt ernet connect ion is up and running.
The following screen depends on your I nt ernet connect ion t ype. Ent er t he det ails provided by your
I nt ernet Service Provider ( I SP) in t he fields ( if any) .
Figure 5 I nt ernet Connect ion Type
Your Rout er det ect s t he following I nt ernet Connect ion t ype.
Table 3 I nt ernet Connect ion Type
22
CONNECTION
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
St at ic I P
Select t he St a t ic I P if an adm inist rat or assigns t he I P address of your com put er.
DHCP
Select t he D H CP ( Dynam ic Host Configurat ion Prot ocol) opt ion when t he WAN port is used
as a regular Et hernet .
PPPoE
Select t he PPPoE ( Point- t o- Point Prot ocol over Et hernet ) opt ion for a dial- up connect ion.
PPTP
Select t he PPTP ( Point- t o- Point Tunneling Prot ocol) opt ion for a dial- up connect ion, and
your I SP gave you an I P address and/ or subnet m ask.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 2 Connection Wizard
2.3.1 Connection Type: DHCP
Choose D H CP as t he I nt e r ne t Conne ct ion Type when t he WAN port is used as a regular
Et hernet . Click N e x t .
Figure 6 I nt ernet Connect ion Type: DHCP
Not e: I f you get an err or screen aft er clicking N e x t , you m ight have select ed t he w rong
I nt ernet Connect ion t ype. Click Ba ck , m ake sure your I nt ernet connect ion is
working and select t he right Connect ion Type. Cont act your I SP if you are not sure
of your I nt er net Connect ion t ype.
2.3.2 Connection Type: Static IP
Choose St a t ic I P as t he I n t e r n e t Con n e ct ion Type if your I SP assigned an I P address for your
I nt ernet connect ion. Click N e x t .
Figure 7 I nt ernet Connect ion Type: St at ic I P
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 4 I nt ernet Connect ion Type: St at ic I P
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I nt ernet
Connect ion
Type
Select t he St a t ic I P opt ion.
I P Address
Ent er t he I P address provided by your I SP.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
23
Chapter 2 Connection Wizard
Table 4 I nt ernet Connect ion Type: St at ic I P ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Subnet Mask
Ent er t he I P subnet m ask in t his field.
Default
Gat eway
Ent er t he gat eway I P address in t his field.
Prim ary DNS
DNS ( Dom ain Nam e Syst em ) is for m apping a dom ain nam e t o it s corresponding I P address
and vice versa. The DNS server is ext rem ely im port ant because wit hout it , you m ust know
t he I P address of a com put er before you can access it . The Rout er uses a syst em DNS
server ( in t he order you specify here) t o resolve dom ain nam es for DDNS and t he t im e
server.
Ent er t he prim ary DNS server's I P address in t he fields provided.
Secondary DNS
Ent er t he secondary DNS server's I P address in t he fields provided.
Exit
Click t his t o close t he wizard screen wit hout saving.
Back
Click t his t o ret urn t o t he previous screen.
Next
Click t his t o cont inue.
2.3.3 Connection Type: PPPoE
Point- t o- Point Prot ocol over Et hernet ( PPPoE) funct ions as a dial- up connect ion. PPPoE is an I ETF
( I nt ernet Engineering Task Force) st andard specifying how a host personal com put er int eract s wit h
a broadband m odem ( for exam ple DSL, cable, wireless, et c.) t o achieve access t o high- speed dat a
net works.
For t he service provider, PPPoE offers an access and aut hent icat ion m et hod t hat works wit h exist ing
access cont rol syst em s ( for inst ance, RADI US) .
One of t he benefit s of PPPoE is t he abilit y t o let end users access one of m ult iple net work services,
a funct ion known as dynam ic service select ion. This enables t he service provider t o easily creat e
and offer new I P services for specific users.
Operat ionally, PPPoE saves significant effort for bot h t he subscriber and t he I SP/ carrier, as it
requires no specific configurat ion of t he broadband m odem at t he subscriber's sit e.
By im plem ent ing PPPoE direct ly on t he Rout er ( rat her t han individual com put ers) , t he com put ers on
t he LAN do not need PPPoE soft ware inst alled, since t he Rout er does t hat part of t he t ask.
Furt herm ore, wit h NAT, all of t he LAN's com put ers will have I nt ernet access.
Figure 8 I nt ernet Connect ion Type: PPPoE
24
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 2 Connection Wizard
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 5 I nt ernet Connect ion Type: PPPoE
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I nt ernet
Connect ion
Type
Select t he PPPoE opt ion for a dial- up connect ion.
Dynam ic I P
Select t his radio but t on if your I SP did not assign you a fixed I P address.
St at ic I P
Select t his radio but t on, provided by your I SP t o give t he Rout er a fixed, unique I P address.
User Nam e
Type t he user nam e given t o you by your I SP.
Password
Type t he password associat ed wit h t he user nam e above.
Exit
Click t his t o close t he wizard screen wit hout saving.
Back
Click t his t o ret urn t o t he previous screen.
Next
Click t his t o cont inue.
2.3.4 Connection Type: PPTP
Point- t o- Point Tunneling Prot ocol ( PPTP) is a net work prot ocol t hat enables t ransfers of dat a from a
rem ot e client t o a privat e server, creat ing a Virt ual Privat e Net work ( VPN) using TCP/ I P- based
net works.
PPTP support s on- dem and, m ult i- prot ocol, and virt ual privat e net working over public net works,
such as t he I nt ernet .
Refer t o t he appendix for m ore inform at ion on PPTP.
The Rout er support s one PPTP server connect ion at any given t im e.
Figure 9 I nt ernet Connect ion Type: PPTP
The following t able describes t he fields in t his screen
Table 6 I nt ernet Connect ion Type: PPTP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I nt ernet
Connect ion
Type
Select PPTP from t he drop- down list box. To configure a PPTP client , you m ust configure t he
Use r N a m e and Pa ssw or d fields for a PPP connect ion and t he PPTP param et ers for a PPTP
connect ion.
Dynam ic I P
Select t his radio but t on if your I SP did not assign you a fixed I P address.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
25
Chapter 2 Connection Wizard
Table 6 I nt ernet Connect ion Type: PPTP ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
St at ic I P
Select t his radio but t on, provided by your I SP t o give t he Rout er a fixed, unique I P address.
PPTP Address
Type t he ( st at ic) I P address assigned t o you by your I SP.
PPTP Subnet
Mask
Type t he subnet m ask assigned t o you by your I SP ( if given) .
PPTP Gat eway
I P Address
Type t he gat eway I P address of t he PPTP server.
PPTP Server I P
Address
Type t he server I P address of t he PPTP server.
User Nam e
Type t he user nam e given t o you by your I SP.
Password
Type t he password associat ed wit h t he User Nam e above.
Exit
Click t his t o close t he wizard screen wit hout saving.
Back
Click t his t o ret urn t o t he previous screen.
Next
Click t his t o cont inue.
The Rout er connect s t o t he I nt ernet .
Figure 10 Connect ing t o t he I nt ernet
Not e: I f t he Wizard successfully connect s t o t he I nt ernet , it proceeds t o t he next st ep. I f
you get an error m essage, go back t o t he previous scr een and m ake sure you have
ent ered t he cor rect inform at ion pr ovided by your I SP.
26
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 2 Connection Wizard
2.4 Router Password
Change t he login password in t he following screen. Ent er t he new password and ret ype it t o
confirm . Click N e x t t o proceed wit h t he W ir e le ss Se cur it y screen.
Figure 11 Rout er Password
2.5 Wireless Security
Configure Wireless Set t ings. Configure t he wireless net work set t ings on your Rout er in t he following
screen. The fields t hat show up depend on t he kind of securit y you select .
2.5.1 Wireless Security: No Security
Choose N o Se cu r it y in t he Wireless Securit y screen t o let wireless devices wit hin range access
your wireless net work.
Figure 12 Wireless Securit y: No Securit y
NBG6503 User’s Guide
27
Chapter 2 Connection Wizard
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 7 Wireless Securit y: No Securit y
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Radio
Select a wireless radio from t he drop- down list box.
Choose 2 .4 G H z t o set t he securit y set t ing for t he wireless 2.4G band. Choose 5 G H z t o set
t he securit y set t ing for t he wireless 5G band.
Wireless
Net work Nam e
( SSI D)
Ent er a descript ive nam e ( up t o 32 print able 7- bit ASCI I charact ers) for t he wireless LAN.
Securit y m ode
Select a Se cu r it y level from t he drop- down list box.
I f you change t his field on t he Rout er, m ake sure all wireless st at ions use t he sam e SSI D in
order t o access t he net work.
Choose N on e t o have no wireless LAN securit y configured. I f you do not enable any wireless
securit y on your Rout er, your net work is accessible t o any wireless net working device t hat is
wit hin range.
Exit
Click t his t o close t he wizard screen wit hout saving.
Back
Click t his t o ret urn t o t he previous screen.
Next
Click t his t o cont inue.
2.5.2 Wireless Security: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
Choose W PA- PSK or W PA2 - PSK securit y in t he Wireless Securit y screen t o set up a password for
your wireless net work.
Figure 13 Wireless Securit y: WPA- PSK/ WPA2- PSK
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 8 Wireless Securit y: WPA- PSK/ WPA2- PSK
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Radio
Select a wireless radio from t he drop- down list box.
Choose 2 .4 G H z t o set t he securit y set t ing for t he wireless 2.4G band. Choose 5 G H z t o set
t he securit y set t ing for t he wireless 5G band.
Wireless
Net work Nam e
( SSI D)
28
Ent er a descript ive nam e ( up t o 32 print able 7- bit ASCI I charact ers) for t he wireless LAN.
I f you change t his field on t he Rout er, m ake sure all wireless st at ions use t he sam e SSI D in
order t o access t he net work.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 2 Connection Wizard
Table 8 Wireless Securit y: WPA- PSK/ WPA2- PSK ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Securit y m ode
Select a Se cu r it y level from t he drop- down list box.
Choose W PA- PSK or W PA2 - PSK securit y t o configure a Pre- Shared Key. Choose t his
opt ion only if your wireless client s support WPA- PSK or WPA2- PSK respect ively.
Wireless
password
Type from 8 t o 63 case- sensit ive ASCI I charact ers. You can set up t he m ost secure wireless
connect ion by configuring WPA in t he wireless LAN screens.
Verify Password
Ret ype t he password t o confirm .
Exit
Click t his t o close t he wizard screen wit hout saving.
Back
Click t his t o ret urn t o t he previous screen.
Next
Click t his t o cont inue.
Congrat ulat ions! Open a web browser, such as I nt ernet Explorer, t o visit your favorit e websit e.
Not e: I f you cannot access t he I nt ernet w hen your com put er is connect ed t o one of t he
Rout er’s LAN port s, check your connect ions. Then t urn t he Rout er off, wait for a few
seconds t hen t urn it back on. I f t hat does not work, log in t o t he web configurat or
again and check you have t yped all inform at ion cor rect ly. See t he User ’s Guide for
m ore suggest ions.
Figure 14 Congrat ulat ions
You can also click GO t o open t he Ea sy M ode Web Configurat or of your Rout er.
You have successfully set up your Rout er t o operat e on your net work and access t he I nt ernet . You
are now ready t o connect wirelessly t o your Rout er and access t he I nt ernet .
NBG6503 User’s Guide
29
C HAPT ER
Introducing the Web Configurator
3.1 Overview
This chapt er describes how t o access t he Rout er Web Configurat or and provides an overview of it s
screens.
The Web Configurat or is an HTML- based m anagem ent int erface t hat allows easy set up and
m anagem ent of t he Rout er via I nt ernet browser. Use I nt ernet Explorer 6.0 and lat er or Net scape
Navigat or 7.0 and lat er versions or Safari 2.0 or lat er versions. The recom m ended screen resolut ion
is 1024 by 768 pixels.
I n order t o use t he Web Configurat or you need t o allow:
• Web browser pop- up windows from your device. Web pop- up blocking is enabled by default in
Windows XP SP ( Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScript ( enabled by default ) .
• Java perm issions ( enabled by default ) .
Refer t o t he Troubleshoot ing chapt er ( Chapt er 23 on page 165) t o see how t o m ake sure t hese
funct ions are allowed in I nt ernet Explorer.
3.2 Accessing the Web Configurator
Make sure your Rout er hardware is properly connect ed and prepare your com put er or com put er
net work t o connect t o t he Rout er ( refer t o t he Quick St art Guide) .
Launch your web browser.
Type " ht t p: / / 192.168.1.1" as t he websit e address.
Your com put er m ust be in t he sam e subnet in order t o access t his websit e address.
3.2.1 Login Screen
Not e: I f t his is t he first t im e you are accessing t he Web Configurat or, you m ay be
redirect ed t o t he Wizard. Refer t o Chapt er 2 on page 21 for t he Connect ion Wizard
screens.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
31
Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator
The Web Configurat or init ially displays t he following login screen.
Figure 15 Login screen
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 9 Login screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Password
Type " 1234" ( default ) as t he password.
Language
Select t he language you want t o use t o configure t he Web Configurat or. Click Login.
This shows t he current weat her, eit her in celsius or fahrenheit , of t he cit y you specify in
Sect ion 3.2.3.1 on page 34.
This shows t he t im e ( hh: m m : ss) and dat e ( yyyy: m m : dd) of t he t im ezone you select in
Sect ion 3.2.3.2 on page 34 or Sect ion 22.5 on page 157. The t im e is in 24- hour form at , for
exam ple 15: 00 is 3: 00 PM.
3.2.2 Password Screen
You should see a screen asking you t o change your password ( highly recom m ended) as shown
next .
Figure 16 Change Password Screen
32
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 10 Change Password Screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
New Password
Type a new password.
Ret ype t o Confirm
Ret ype t he password for confirm at ion.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
I gnore
Click I gn or e if you do not want t o change t he password t his t im e.
Not e: The m anagem ent session aut om at ically t im es out when t he t im e period set in t he
Adm in ist r a t or I n a ct ivit y Tim e r field expir es ( default five m inut es; go t o Chapt er
22 on page 155 t o change t his) . Sim ply log back int o t he Rout er if t his happens.
3.2.3 Home Screen
I f you have previously logged int o t he Web Configurat or but did not click Logout , you m ay be
redirect ed t o t he Hom e screen.
You can also open t his screen by clicking H om e (
m ode screens.
or
) in t he Easy Mode or Expert
The Hom e screen displays as follows.
Figure 17 Hom e Screen
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 11 Hom e Screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Go
Click t his t o open t he Easy m ode Web Configurat or.
Language
Select a language t o go t o t he Easy m ode Web Configurat or in t hat language and click
Login .
NBG6503 User’s Guide
33
Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator
Table 11 Hom e Screen ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
( This is j ust an exam ple) . This shows t he current weat her, eit her in celsius or fahrenheit , of
t he cit y you specify in Sect ion 3.2.3.1 on page 34.
( This is j ust an exam ple) . This shows t he t im e ( hh: m m : ss) and dat e ( yyyy: m m : dd) of t he
t im ezone you select in Sect ion 3.2.3.2 on page 34 or Sect ion 22.5 on page 157.
3.2.3.1 Weather Edit
You can change t he t em perat ure unit and select t he locat ion for which you want t o know t he
weat her.
Click t he
icon t o change t he Weat her display.
Figure 18 Change Weat her
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 12 Change Weat her
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Choose which t em perat ure unit you want t he Rout er t o display.
C or o F
Change
Locat ion
Select t he locat ion for which you want t o know t he weat her. I f t he cit y you want is not list ed,
choose one t hat is closest t o it .
Finish
Click t his t o apply t he set t ings and refresh t he dat e and t im e display.
3.2.3.2 Time/Date Edit
One t im ezone can cover m ore t han one count ry. You can choose a part icular count ry in which t he
Rout er is locat ed and have t he Rout er display and use t he current t im e and dat e for it s logs.
Click t he
icon t o change t he Weat her display.
Figure 19 Change Password Screen
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 13 Change Password Screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Change t im e
zone
Select t he specific count ry whose current t im e and dat e you want t he Rout er t o display.
Finish
Click t his t o apply t he set t ings and refresh t he weat her display.
Not e: You can also edit t he t im ezone in Sect ion 22.5 on page 157.
34
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator
3.3 Resetting the Router
I f you forget your password or I P address, or you cannot access t he Web Configurat or, you will need
t o use t he RESET but t on at t he back of t he Rout er t o reload t he fact ory- default configurat ion file.
This m eans t hat you will lose all configurat ions t hat you had previously saved, t he password will be
reset t o “ 1234” and t he I P address will be reset t o “ 192.168.1.1”.
3.3.1 Procedure to Use the Reset Button
Make sure t he power LED is on.
Press t he RESET but t on for longer t han 1 second t o rest art / reboot t he Rout er.
Press t he RESET but t on for longer t han five seconds t o set t he Rout er back t o it s fact ory- default
configurat ions.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
35
C HAPT ER
Monitor
4.1 Overview
This chapt er discusses read- only inform at ion relat ed t o t he device st at e of t he Rout er.
Not e: To access t he Monit or screens, you can also click t he links in t he Sum m ary t able of
t he St at us screen t o view t he bandwidt h consum ed, packet s sent / received as well
as t he st at us of client s connect ed t o t he Rout er.
4.2 What You Can Do
• Use t he Log ( Sect ion 4.3 on page 37) screen t o see t he logs for t he act ivit y on t he Rout er.
• Use t he BW M GM T M onit or screen ( Sect ion 4.4 on page 39) t o view t he am ount of net work
bandwidt h t hat applicat ions running in t he net work are using.
• Use t he D H CP Ta ble screen ( Sect ion 4.5 on page 39) t o view inform at ion relat ed t o your DHCP
st at us.
• Use t he Pa ck e t St a t ist ics screen ( Sect ion 4.6 on page 40) t o view port st at us, packet specific
st at ist ics, t he " syst em up t im e" and so on.
• Use t he W LAN 2 .4 G St a t ion St a t us screen ( Sect ion 4.7 on page 41) t o view t he wireless
st at ions t hat are current ly associat ed t o t he Rout er t hrough t he wireless 2.4G net work.
• Use t he W LAN 5 G St a t ion St a t u s screen ( Sect ion 4.8 on page 41) t o view t he wireless st at ions
t hat are current ly associat ed t o t he Rout er t hrough t he wireless 5G net work.
4.3 The Log Screen
The Web Configurat or allows you t o look at all of t he Rout er’s logs in one locat ion.
4.3.1 View Log
Use t he Vie w Log screen t o see t he logged m essages for t he Rout er. The log wraps around and
delet es t he old ent ries aft er it fills. Select what logs you want t o see from t he D ispla y drop list . The
NBG6503 User’s Guide
37
Chapter 4 Monitor
log choices depend on your set t ings in t he Log Se t t ings screen. Click Re fr e sh t o renew t he log
screen. Click Cle a r t o delet e all t he logs.
Figure 20 View Log
You can configure which logs t o display in t he Vie w Log screen. Go t o t he Log Se t t in gs screen
and select t he logs you wish t o display. Click Apply t o save your set t ings. Click Re fr e sh t o st art t he
screen afresh.
Figure 21 Log Set t ings
38
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Monitor
4.4 BW MGMT Monitor
The Bandwidt h Managem ent ( BW MGMT) Monit or allows you t o view t he am ount of net work
bandwidt h t hat applicat ions running in t he net work are using.
The bandwidt h is m easured in kilobit s per second ( kbps) .
The m onit or shows what kinds of applicat ions are running in t he net work, t he m axim um kbps t hat
each applicat ion can use, as well as t he percent age of bandwidt h it is using.
Figure 22 Sum m ary: BW MGMT Monit or
4.5 DHCP Table
DHCP ( Dynam ic Host Configurat ion Prot ocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual client s t o
obt ain TCP/ I P configurat ion at st art - up from a server. You can configure t he Rout er’s LAN as a DHCP
server or disable it . When configured as a server, t he Rout er provides t he TCP/ I P configurat ion for
t he client s. I f DHCP service is disabled, you m ust have anot her DHCP server on t hat net work, or
else t he com put er m ust be m anually configured.
Click t he D H CP Ta ble ( D e t a ils...) hyperlink in t he St a t u s screen. Read- only inform at ion here
relat es t o your DHCP st at us. The DHCP t able shows current DHCP client inform at ion ( including I P
Addr e ss, H ost N a m e and M AC Addr e ss) of all net work client s using t he Rout er’s DHCP server.
Figure 23 Sum m ary: DHCP Table
NBG6503 User’s Guide
39
Chapter 4 Monitor
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 14 Sum m ary: DHCP Table
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is t he index num ber of t he host com put er.
MAC Address
This field shows t he MAC address of t he com put er wit h t he nam e in t he H ost N a m e field.
Every Et hernet device has a unique MAC ( Media Access Cont rol) address which uniquely
ident ifies a device. The MAC address is assigned at t he fact ory and consist s of six pairs of
hexadecim al charact ers, for exam ple, 00: A0: C5: 00: 00: 02.
I P Address
This field displays t he I P address relat ive t o t he # field list ed above.
Expires in
This field displays t he t im e when t he I P address and MAC address associat ion ends.
Refresh
Click Re fr e sh t o renew t he screen.
4.6 Packet Statistics
Click t he Pa ck e t St a t ist ics ( D e t a ils...) hyperlink in t he St a t u s screen. Read- only inform at ion
here includes port st at us, packet specific st at ist ics and t he " syst em up t im e" . The Poll I nt e r va l( s)
field is configurable and is used for refreshing t he screen.
Figure 24 Sum m ary: Packet St at ist ics
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 15 Sum m ary: Packet St at ist ics
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Port
This is t he Rout er’s port t ype.
St at us
For t he LAN port s, t his displays t he port speed and duplex set t ing or D ow n when t he line is
disconnect ed.
For t he WAN port , it displays t he port speed and duplex set t ing if you’re using Et hernet
encapsulat ion and I dle ( line ( ppp) idle) , D ia l ( st art ing t o t rigger a call) and D r op ( dropping
a call) if you're using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulat ion. This field displays D ow n when t he line is
disconnect ed.
For WLAN 2.4G/ 5G, it displays t he m axim um t ransm ission rat e when t he WLAN 2.4G/ 5G is
enabled and D ow n when t he WLAN 2.4G/ 5G is disabled.
40
TxPkt s
This is t he num ber of t ransm it t ed packet s on t his port .
RxPkt s
This is t he num ber of received packet s on t his port .
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Monitor
Table 15 Sum m ary: Packet St at ist ics ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Collisions
This is t he num ber of collisions on t his port .
Tx B/ s
This displays t he t ransm ission speed in byt es per second on t his port .
Rx B/ s
This displays t he recept ion speed in byt es per second on t his port .
Up Tim e
This is t he t ot al t im e t he Rout er has been for each session.
Syst em Up
Tim e
This is t he t ot al t im e t he Rout er has been on.
Poll I nt erval( s)
Ent er t he t im e int erval in seconds for refreshing st at ist ics in t his field.
Set I nt erval
Click t his but t on t o apply t he new poll int erval you ent ered in t he Poll I nt e r va l( s) field.
St op
Click St op t o st op refreshing st at ist ics.
4.7 WLAN 2.4G Station Status
Click t he W LAN 2 .4 G St a t ion St a t us ( D e t a ils...) hyperlink in t he St a t us screen. View t he
wireless st at ions t hat are current ly associat ed t o t he Rout er in t he Associa t ion List . Associat ion
m eans t hat a wireless client ( for exam ple, your net work or com put er wit h a wireless net work card)
has connect ed successfully t o t he AP ( or wireless rout er) using t he sam e SSI D, channel and
securit y set t ings.
Figure 25 Sum m ary: Wireless Associat ion List
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 16 Sum m ary: Wireless Associat ion List
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is t he index num ber of an associat ed wireless st at ion.
MAC Address
This field displays t he MAC address of an associat ed wireless st at ion.
Associat ion
Tim e
This field displays t he t im e a wireless st at ion first associat ed wit h t he Rout er’s WLAN
net work.
Refresh
Click Re fr e sh t o reload t he list .
4.8 WLAN 5G Station Status
Click t he W LAN 5 G St a t ion St a t u s ( D e t a ils...) hyperlink in t he St a t us screen. View t he wireless
st at ions t hat are current ly associat ed t o t he Rout er in t he Associa t ion List . Associat ion m eans
t hat a wireless client ( for exam ple, your net work or com put er wit h a wireless net work card) has
NBG6503 User’s Guide
41
Chapter 4 Monitor
connect ed successfully t o t he AP ( or wireless rout er) using t he sam e SSI D, channel and securit y
set t ings.
Figure 26 Sum m ary: Wireless Associat ion List
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 17 Sum m ary: Wireless Associat ion List
42
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is t he index num ber of an associat ed wireless st at ion.
MAC Address
This field displays t he MAC address of an associat ed wireless st at ion.
Associat ion
Tim e
This field displays t he t im e a wireless st at ion first associat ed wit h t he Rout er’s WLAN
net work.
Refresh
Click Re fr e sh t o reload t he list .
NBG6503 User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Router Modes
5.1 Overview
This chapt er int roduces t he different m odes available on your Rout er. First , t he t erm “ m ode” refers
t o t wo t hings in t his User ’s Guide.
• W e b Configu r a t or m ode . This refers t o t he Web Configurat or int erface you want t o use for
edit ing Rout er feat ures.
• D e vice m ode . This is t he operat ing m ode of your Rout er, or sim ply how t he Rout er is being used
in t he net work.
5.1.1 Web Configurator Modes
This refers t o t he configurat ion int erface of t he Web Configurat or, which has t wo m odes:
• Ea sy. The Web Configurat or shows t his m ode by default . Refer t o Chapt er 6 on page 45 for m ore
inform at ion on t he screens in t his m ode. This int erface m ay be sufficient for users who j ust want
t o use t he device.
• Ex pe r t . Advanced users can change t o t his m ode t o cust om ize all t he funct ions of t he Rout er.
Click Ex pe r t M ode aft er logging int o t he Web Configurat or. The User ’s Guide Chapt er 3 on page
31 t hrough Chapt er 22 on page 155 discusses t he screens in t his m ode.
5.1.2 Device Modes
This refers t o t he operat ing m ode of t he Rout er, which can act as a:
• Rout e r. This is t he default device m ode of t he Rout er. Use t his m ode t o connect t he local
net work t o anot her net work, like t he I nt ernet . Go t o Sect ion 7.3 on page 58 t o view t he St a t us
screen in t his m ode.
• Acce ss Point . Use t his m ode if you want t o ext end your net work by allowing net work devices t o
connect t o t he Rout er wirelessly. Go t o Sect ion 8.4 on page 68 view t he St a t us screen in t his
m ode.
For m ore inform at ion on t hese m odes and t o change t he m ode of your Rout er, refer t o Sect ion
22.10 on page 163.
The m enu for changing device m odes is available in Ex pe r t m ode only.
Not e: Choose your Device Mode carefully t o avoid having t o change it lat er.
When changing t o anot her m ode, t he I P address of t he Rout er changes. The running applicat ions
and services of t he net work devices connect ed t o t he Rout er can be int errupt ed.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
43
Chapter 5 Router Modes
44
NBG6503 User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Easy Mode
6.1 Overview
The Web Configurat or is set t o Ea sy M ode by default . You can configure several key feat ures of t he
Rout er in t his m ode. This m ode is useful t o users who are not fully fam iliar wit h som e feat ures t hat
are usually int ended for net work adm inist rat ors.
When you log in t o t he Web Configurat or, t he following screen opens.
Figure 27 Easy Mode: Net work Map
Navigation Panel
Network Map
Go to
Status
Screen
Control Panel
NBG6503 User’s Guide
45
Chapter 6 Easy Mode
Click St a t us t o open t he following screen screen.
Figure 28 Easy Mode: St at us Screen
Navigation Panel
Go to
Network
Map
Screen
Status Screen
Control Panel
Right- click N BG6 5 0 3 t o open t he pop up m enu.
Figure 29 Easy Mode: Pop Up Menu
Navigation Panel
Pop Up Menu
Control Panel
46
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Easy Mode
6.2 What You Can Do
You can do t he following in t his m ode:
• Use t his N a viga t ion Pa ne l ( Sect ion 6.4 on page 47) t o opt out of t he Ea sy m ode.
• Use t he N e t w or k M a p screen ( Sect ion 6.5 on page 47) t o check if your Rout er can ping t he
gat eway and whet her it is connect ed t o t he I nt ernet .
• Use t he Cont r ol Pa n e l ( Sect ion 6.6 on page 48) t o configure and enable Rout er feat ures,
including wireless securit y, wireless scheduling and bandwidt h m anagem ent and so on.
• Use t he St a t us Scr e e n screen ( Sect ion 6.7 on page 55) t o view read- only inform at ion about t he
Rout er, including t he WAN I P, MAC Address of t he Rout er and t he firm ware version.
• Use t he Pop Up M e n u t o refresh t he Rout er or run t he e a Zy1 2 3 wizard ( Sect ion 2.2 on page
21) .
6.3 What You Need to Know
Bet ween t he different device m odes, t he Cont rol Panel ( Sect ion 6.6 on page 48) changes depending
on which feat ures are applicable t o t he m ode:
• Rout e r M ode : All Cont rol Panel feat ures are available.
• Acce ss Point M ode : Only Pow e r Sa vin g and W ir e le ss Se cur it y are available.
6.4 Navigation Panel
Use t his navigat ion panel t o opt out of t he Ea sy m ode.
Figure 30 Navigat ion Panel
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 18 Navigat ion Panel
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Hom e
Click t his t o go t o t he Login page.
Expert Mode
Click t his t o change t o Ex pe r t m ode and cust om ize feat ures of t he Rout er.
Logout
Click t his t o end t he Web Configurat or session.
6.5 Network Map
Not e: The Net work MAP is viewable by Windows XP ( need t o inst all pat ch) , Windows
Vist a and Windows 7 users only. For Windows XP ( Service Pack 2) users, you can
see t he net w ork devices connect ed t o t he Rout er by downloading t he LLTD ( Link
Layer Topology Discovery) pat ch fr om t he Microsoft Websit e.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
47
Chapter 6 Easy Mode
Not e: Don’t worry if t he Net work Map does not display in your web br owser. This feat ure
m ay not be support ed by your syst em . You can st ill configure t he Cont rol Panel
( Sect ion 6.6 on page 48) in t he Easy Mode and t he Rout er feat ures t hat you want t o
use in t he Expert Mode.
When you log int o t he Net work Configurat or, t he Net work Map is shown as follows.
Figure 31 Net work Map
The line connect ing t he Rout er t o t he gat eway becom es green when t he Rout er is able t o ping t he
gat eway. I t becom es red when t he ping init iat ing from t he Rout er does not get a response from t he
gat eway. The sam e rule applies t o t he line connect ing t he gat eway t o t he I nt ernet .
You can also view t he devices ( represent ed by icons indicat ing t he kind of net work device)
connect ed t o t he Rout er, including t hose connect ing wirelessly. Right- click on t he Rout er icon t o
refresh t he net work m ap and go t o t he Wizard. Right click on t he ot her icons t o view inform at ion
about t he device.
6.6 Control Panel
The feat ures configurable in Ea sy M ode are shown in t he Con t r ol Pa n e l.
Figure 32 Cont rol Panel
Swit ch ON t o enable t he feat ure. Ot herwise, swit ch OFF. I f t he feat ure is t urned on, t he green light
flashes. I f it is t urned off, t he red light flashes.
Addit ionally, click t he feat ure t o open a screen where you can edit it s set t ings.
48
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Easy Mode
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 19 Cont rol Panel
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Gam e Engine
Swit ch ON t o m axim ize bandwidt h for gam ing t raffic in your net work. Ot herwise, swit ch
OFF.
Refer t o Sect ion 6.6.1 on page 49 t o see t his screen.
Power Saving
Click t his t o schedule t he wireless feat ure of t he Rout er.
Disabling t he wireless funct ion helps lower t he energy consum pt ion of t he Rout er.
Swit ch ON t o apply wireless scheduling. Ot herwise, swit ch OFF.
Refer t o Sect ion 6.6.2 on page 50 t o see t his screen.
Cont ent Filt er
Click t his t o rest rict access t o cert ain websit es, based on keywords cont ained in URLs, t o
which you do not want users in your net work t o open.
Swit ch ON t o apply websit e filt ering. Ot herwise, swit ch OFF.
Refer t o Sect ion 6.6.3 on page 51 t o see t his screen.
Bandw idt h
MGMT
Click t his t o edit bandwidt h m anagem ent for predefined applicat ions.
Swit ch ON t o have t he Rout er m anagem ent bandwidt h for uplink and downlink t raffic
according t o an applicat ion or service. Ot herwise, swit ch OFF.
Refer t o Sect ion 6.6.4 on page 51 t o see t his screen.
Firewall
Swit ch ON t o ensure t hat your net work is prot ect ed from Denial of Service ( DoS) at t acks.
Ot herwise, swit ch OFF.
Refer t o Sect ion 6.6.5 on page 52 t o see t his screen.
Wireless
Securit y
Click t his t o configure t he wireless securit y, such as SSI D, securit y m ode and WPS key on
your Rout er.
Refer t o Sect ion 6.6.6 on page 52 t o see t his screen.
6.6.1 Game Engine
When t his feat ure is enabled, t he Rout er m axim izes t he bandwidt h for gam ing t raffic t hat it
forwards out t hrough an int erface.
Figure 33 Gam e Engine
Not e: When t his is swit ched on, t he Ga m e Con sole t ab in t he Bandwidth MGMT screen
is aut om at ically posit ioned on t op.
Turn t his off if your net work is not using gam ing.
Click OK t o close t his screen.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
49
Chapter 6 Easy Mode
6.6.2 Power Saving
Use t his screen t o set t he day of t he week and t im e of t he day when your wireless LAN is t urned on
and off. Wireless LAN scheduling is disabled by default .
Disabling t he wireless capabilit y lowers t he energy consum pt ion of t he of t he Rout er.
Figure 34 Power Saving
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 20 Power Saving
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Radio
Select t he wireless radio t o set it s power saving set t ings.
WLAN St at us
Select On or Off t o specify whet her t he Wireless LAN is t urned on or off ( depending on
what you select ed in t he W LAN St a t us field) . This field works in conj unct ion wit h t he
D a y and Ex ce pt for t h e follow ing t im e s fields.
Day
Select Eve r yda y or t he specific days t o t urn t he Wireless LAN on or off.
I f you select Eve r yda y you can not select any specific days. This field works in
conj unct ion wit h t he Ex ce pt for t h e follow in g t im e s field.
For t he following
t im es ( 24- Hour
Form at )
Select a begin t im e using t he first set of h our and m inut e ( m in ) drop down boxes and
select an end t im e using t he second set of h ou r and m inut e ( m in ) drop down boxes. I f
you have chosen On earlier for t he WLAN St at us t he Wireless LAN will t urn on bet ween
t he t wo t im es you ent er in t hese fields. I f you have chosen Off earlier for t he WLAN
St at us t he Wireless LAN will t urn off bet ween t he t wo t im es you ent er in t hese fields.
I n t his t im e form at , m idnight is 00: 00 and progresses up t o 24: 00. For exam ple, 6: 00 PM
is 18: 00.
50
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Reset
Click Re se t t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Easy Mode
6.6.3 Content Filter
Use t his screen t o rest rict access t o cert ain websit es, based on keywords cont ained in URLs, t o
which you do not want users in your net work t o open.
Figure 35 Cont ent Filt er
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 21 Cont ent Filt er
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add
Click Add aft er you have t yped a keyword.
Repeat t his procedure t o add ot her keywords. Up t o 64 keywords are allowed.
Note: The Router does not recognize wildcard characters as keywords.
When you t ry t o access a web page cont aining a keyword, you will get a m essage t elling you
t hat t he cont ent filt er is blocking t his request .
Delet e
Highlight a keyword in t he t ext box and click D e le t e t o rem ove it . The keyword disappears
from t he t ext box aft er you click Apply.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca nce l t o close t his screen wit hout saving any changes.
6.6.4 Bandwidth MGMT
Use t his screen t o set bandwidt h allocat ion t o pre- defined services and applicat ions for bandwidt h
allocat ion.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
51
Chapter 6 Easy Mode
The Rout er uses bandwidt h m anagem ent for incom ing and out going t raffic. Rank t he services and
applicat ions by dragging t hem accordingly from H igh t o Low and click Apply. Click Ca nce l t o close
t he screen.
Figure 36 Bandwidt h MGNT
Use your mouse
to drag the items
according to how
you want to
prioritze them.
Left-click and
slide up or down.
6.6.5 Firewall
Enable t his feat ure t o prot ect t he net work from Denial of Service ( DoS) at t acks. The Rout er blocks
repet it ive pings from t he WAN t hat can ot herwise cause syst em s t o slow down or hang.
Figure 37 Firewall
Click OK t o close t his screen.
6.6.6 Wireless Security
Use t his screen t o configure securit y for your t he Wireless LAN. You can ent er t he SSI D and select
t he wireless securit y m ode in t he following screen.
52
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Easy Mode
Not e: You can enable t he Wireless funct ion of your Rout er by first t urning on t he swit ch in
t he back panel.
Figure 38 Wireless Securit y
The following t able describes t he general wireless LAN labels in t his screen.
Table 22 Wireless Securit y
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Radio
Select t he wireless radio t o set it s securit y set t ing.
Wireless
Net work Nam e
( SSI D)
( Service Set I Dent it y) The SSI D ident ifies t he Service Set wit h which a wireless st at ion is
associat ed. Wireless st at ions associat ing t o t he access point ( AP) m ust have t he sam e SSI D.
Ent er a descript ive nam e ( up t o 32 keyboard charact ers) for t he wireless LAN.
Securit y m ode
Select W PA- PSK or W PA2 - PSK t o add securit y on t his wireless net work. The wireless
client s w hich want t o associat e t o t his net work m ust have sam e w ireless securit y set t ings as
t his device. Aft er you select t o use a securit y, addit ional opt ions appears in t his screen.
Select N o Se cu r it y t o allow any client t o connect t o t his net work wit hout aut hent icat ion.
Wireless
password
This field appears when you choose wit her W PA- PSK or W PA2 - PSK as t he securit y m ode.
Verify password
Type t he password again t o confirm .
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l t o close t his screen.
WPS
Click t his t o configure t he WPS screen.
Type a pre- shared key from 8 t o 63 case- sensit ive keyboard charact ers.
You can t ransfer t he wireless set t ings configured here ( W ir e le ss Se cu r it y screen) t o
anot her wireless device t hat support s WPS.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
53
Chapter 6 Easy Mode
6.6.7 WPS
Use t his screen t o add a wireless st at ion t o t he net work using WPS. Click W PS in t he W ir e le ss
Se cur it y t o open t he following screen.
Figure 39 Wireless Securit y: WPS
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 23 Wireless Securit y: WPS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless
Securit y
Click t his t o go back t o t he Wireless Securit y screen.
WPS
Creat e a secure wireless net work sim ply by pressing a but t on.
The Rout er scans for a WPS- enabled device w it hin t he range and perform s wireless securit y
inform at ion synchronizat ion.
Note: After you click the WPS button on this screen, you have to press a similar button in the
wireless station utility within 2 minutes. To add the second wireless station, you have
to press these buttons on both device and the wireless station again after the first 2
minutes.
Regist er
Creat e a secure wireless net work sim ply by ent ering a wireless client 's PI N ( Personal
I dent ificat ion Num ber) in t he Rout er’s int erface and pushing t his but t on.
Type t he sam e PI N num ber generat ed in t he wireless st at ion’s ut ilit y. Then click Re gist e r t o
associat e t o each ot her and perform t he wireless securit y inform at ion synchronizat ion.
Exit
54
Click Ex it t o close t his screen.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Easy Mode
6.7 Status Screen in Easy Mode
I n t he Net work Map screen, click St a t us t o view read- only inform at ion about t he Rout er.
Figure 40 St at us Screen in Easy Mode
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 24 St at us Screen in Easy Mode
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Nam e
This is t he nam e of t he Rout er in t he net work. You can change t his in t he M a int e n a n ce >
Ge n e r a l screen in Sect ion 22.3 on page 155.
Tim e
This is t he current syst em dat e and t im e.
The dat e is in YYYY: MM: DD ( Year- Mont h- Day) form at . The t im e is in HH: MM: SS
( Hour: Minut es: Seconds) form at .
WAN I P
This is t he I P address of t he WAN port .
MAC Address
This is t he MAC address of t he Rout er.
Firm ware
Version
This shows t he firm ware version of t he Rout er.
Wireless 2.4G
Net work Nam e
This shows t he SSI D of t he wireless 2.4G net work. You can configure t his in t he Wireless
Securit y screen ( Sect ion 6.6.6 on page 52; Sect ion 10.3.1.1 on page 84) .
Securit y
This shows t he wireless securit y used by t he Rout er for t he 2.4G w ireless radio.
Wireless 5G
Net work Nam e
This shows t he SSI D of t he wireless 5G net work. You can configure t his in t he Wireless
Securit y screen ( Sect ion 6.6.6 on page 52; Sect ion 10.3.1.1 on page 84) .
Securit y
This shows t he wireless securit y used by t he Rout er for t he 5G wireless radio.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
The firm ware version form at shows t he t runk version, m odel code and release num ber.
55
Chapter 6 Easy Mode
56
NBG6503 User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Router Mode
7.1 Overview
The Rout er is set t o rout er m ode by default . Rout ers are used t o connect t he local net work t o
anot her net work ( for exam ple, t he I nt ernet ) . I n t he figure below, t he Rout er connect s t he local
net work ( LAN 1 ~ LAN 4 ) t o t he I nt ernet .
Figure 41 Rout er Net work
Modem
Rou t e r
Not e: The St at us scr een is shown aft er changing t o t he Expert m ode of t he Web
Configurat or. I t varies depending on t he device m ode of your Rout er.
7.2 What You Can Do
Use t he St a t u s screen ( Sect ion 7.3 on page 58) t o view read- only inform at ion about your Rout er.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
57
Chapter 7 Router Mode
7.3 Status Screen
Click
t o open t he st at us screen.
Figure 42 St at us Screen: Rout er Mode
The following t able describes t he icons shown in t he St a t u s screen.
Table 25 St at us Screen I con Key: Rout er Mode
ICON
DESCRIPTION
Click t his icon t o view copyright and a link for relat ed product inform at ion.
Click t his icon t o go t o Easy Mode. See Chapt er 6 on page 45.
Click t his t o go t o t he Hom e page. See Chapt er 4 on page 37.
Select a num ber of seconds or N on e from t he drop- down list box t o refresh all screen st at ist ics
aut om at ically at t he end of every t im e int erval or t o not refresh t he screen st at ist ics.
Click t his but t on t o refresh t he st at us screen st at ist ics.
Click t his icon t o see t he St at us page. The inform at ion in t his screen depends on t he device
m ode you select .
Click t his icon t o see t he M on it or navigat ion m enu.
58
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Router Mode
Table 25 St at us Screen I con Key: Rout er Mode ( cont inued)
ICON
DESCRIPTION
Click t his icon t o see t he Con figu r a t ion navigat ion m enu.
Click t his icon t o see t he M a in t e n a n ce navigat ion m enu.
The following t able describes t he labels shown in t he St a t u s screen.
Table 26 St at us Screen: Rout er Mode
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Logout
Click t his at any t im e t o exit t he Web Configurat or.
Device I nform at ion
Host Nam e
This is t he Syst e m N a m e you ent er in t he M a in t e n a n ce > Ge n e r a l screen. I t is for
ident ificat ion purposes.
Firm ware Version
This is t he firm ware version and t he dat e creat ed.
Sys OP Mode
This is t he device m ode ( Sect ion 5.1.2 on page 43) t o which t he Rout er is set - Rou t e r
M ode .
WAN I nform at ion
- MAC Address
This shows t he WAN Et hernet adapt er MAC Address of your device.
- I P Address
This shows t he WAN port ’s I P address.
- I P Subnet Mask
This shows t he WAN port ’s subnet m ask.
- Default Gat eway
This shows t he WAN port ’s gat eway I P address.
- DHCP
This shows t he LAN port ’s DHCP role - Clie nt or Se r ve r.
LAN I nform at ion
- MAC Address
This shows t he LAN Et hernet adapt er MAC Address of your device.
- I P Address
This shows t he LAN port ’s I P address.
- I P Subnet Mask
This shows t he LAN port ’s subnet m ask.
- DHCP
This shows t he LAN port ’s DHCP role - Se r ve r or N on e .
WLAN 2.4G I nform at ion
- WLAN OP Mode
This is t he device m ode ( Sect ion 5.1.2 on page 43) t o which t he Rout er’s wireless LAN is set
- Acce ss Poin t M ode .
- MAC Address
This shows t he wireless adapt er MAC Address of your device.
- SSI D
This shows a descript ive nam e used t o ident ify t he Rout er in t he wireless LAN.
- Channel
This shows t he channel num ber which t he Rout er is current ly using over t he wireless LAN..
- Securit y
This shows t he level of wireless securit y t he Rout er is using.
WLAN 5G I nform at ion
- MAC Address
This shows t he wireless adapt er MAC Address of your device.
- SSI D
This shows a descript ive nam e used t o ident ify t he Rout er in t he wireless LAN.
- Channel
This shows t he channel num ber which t he Rout er is current ly using over t he wireless LAN..
- Securit y
This shows t he level of wireless securit y t he Rout er is using.
Syst em St at us
I t em
This colum n shows t he t ype of dat a t he Rout er is recording.
Dat a
This colum n shows t he act ual dat a recorded by t he Rout er.
Syst em Up Tim e
NBG6503 User’s Guide
This is t he t ot al t im e t he Rout er has been on.
59
Chapter 7 Router Mode
Table 26 St at us Screen: Rout er Mode ( cont inued)
LABEL
Current Dat e/ Tim e
DESCRIPTION
This field displays your Rout er’s present dat e and t im e.
Syst em Resource
- CPU Usage
This displays what percent age of t he Rout er’s processing abilit y is current ly used. When t his
percent age is close t o 100% , t he Rout er is running at full load, and t he t hroughput is not
going t o im prove anym ore. I f you want som e applicat ions t o have m ore t hroughput , you
should t urn off ot her applicat ions ( for exam ple, using bandwidt h m anagem ent .)
- Mem ory Usage
This shows what percent age of t he heap m em ory t he Rout er is using.
Syst em Set t ing
- Firewall
This shows whet her t he firewall is enabled or not .
- Bandwidt h
Managem ent
This shows whet her t he bandwidt h m anagem ent is enabled or not .
- UPnP
This shows whet her UPnP is enabled or not .
- Configurat ion Mode
This shows t he web configurat or m ode you are viewing - Ex pe r t .
I nt erface St at us
I nt erface
This displays t he Rout er port t ypes. The port t ypes are: W AN , LAN and W LAN .
St at us
For t he LAN and WAN port s, t his field displays D ow n ( line is down) or Up ( line is up or
connect ed) .
For t he WLAN, it displays Up when t he WLAN is enabled or D ow n when t he WLAN is
disabled.
Rat e
For t he LAN port s, t his displays t he port speed and duplex set t ing or N / A when t he line is
disconnect ed.
For t he WAN port , it displays t he port speed and duplex set t ing if you’re using Et hernet
encapsulat ion and I dle ( line ( ppp) idle) , D ia l ( st art ing t o t rigger a call) and D r op ( dropping
a call) if you're using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulat ion. This field displays N / A when t he line is
disconnect ed.
For t he WLAN, it displays t he m axim um t ransm ission rat e when t he WLAN is enabled and N /
A when t he WLAN is disabled.
Sum m ary
BW MGMT Monit or
Click D e t a ils... t o go t o t he M on it or > BW M GM T M on it or screen ( Sect ion 4.4 on page
39) . Use t his screen t o view t he am ount of net work bandwidt h t hat applicat ions running in
t he net work are using.
DHCP Table
Click D e t a ils... t o go t o t he M on it or > D H CP Ta ble screen ( Sect ion 4.5 on page 39) . Use
t his screen t o view current DHCP client inform at ion.
Packet St at ist ics
Click D e t a ils... t o go t o t he M onit or > Pa ck e t St a t ist ics screen ( Sect ion 4.6 on page 40) .
Use t his screen t o view port st at us and packet specific st at ist ics.
WLAN St at ion St at us
Click D e t a ils... t o go t o t he M on it or > W LAN 2 .4 G / 5 G St a t ion St a t u s screen ( Sect ion
4.8 on page 41) . Use t his screen t o view t he wireless st at ions t hat are current ly associat ed
t o t he Rout er.
60
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Router Mode
7.3.1 Navigation Panel
Use t he sub- m enus on t he navigat ion panel t o configure Rout er feat ures.
Figure 43 Navigat ion Panel: Rout er Mode
The following t able describes t he sub- m enus.
Table 27 Navigat ion Panel: Rout er Mode
LINK
TAB
St at us
FUNCTION
This screen shows t he Rout er’s general device, syst em and int erface st at us
inform at ion. Use t his screen t o access t he wizard, and sum m ary st at ist ics
t ables.
M ON I TOR
Log
Use t his screen t o view t he list of act ivit ies recorded by your Rout er.
BW MGMT
Use t his screen t o view t he am ount of net work bandwidt h t hat applicat ions
running in t he net work are using.
DHCP Table
Use t his screen t o view current DHCP client inform at ion.
Packet St at ist ics
Use t his screen t o view port st at us and packet specific st at ist ics.
WLAN 2.4G
St at ion St at us
Use t his screen t o view t he wireless st at ions t hat are current ly associat ed
t o t he Rout er t hrough t he wireless 2.4G net work.
WLAN 5G
St at ion St at us
Use t his screen t o view t he wireless st at ions t hat are current ly associat ed
t o t he Rout er t hrough t he wireless 5G net work.
CON FI GURATI ON
Net work
NBG6503 User’s Guide
61
Chapter 7 Router Mode
Table 27 Navigat ion Panel: Rout er Mode ( cont inued)
LINK
TAB
FUNCTION
General
Use t his screen t o configure wireless 2.4G LAN.
MAC Filt er
Use t he MAC filt er screen t o configure t he Rout er t o block access t o devices
or block t he devices from accessing t he Rout er.
Advanced
This screen allows you t o configure advanced wireless set t ings.
QoS
Use t his screen t o configure Wi- Fi Mult im edia Qualit y of Service ( WMM
QoS) . WMM QoS allows you t o priorit ize wireless t raffic according t o t he
delivery requirem ent s of individual services.
WPS
Use t his screen t o configure WPS.
WPS St at ion
Use t his screen t o add a wireless st at ion using WPS.
Scheduling
Use t his screen t o schedule t he t im es t he Wireless LAN is enabled.
WDS
Use t his screen t o set up Wireless Dist ribut ion Syst em ( WDS) on your
Rout er.
General
Use t his screen t o configure wireless 5G LAN.
MAC Filt er
Use t he MAC filt er screen t o configure t he Rout er t o block access t o devices
or block t he devices from accessing t he Rout er.
Advanced
This screen allows you t o configure advanced wireless set t ings.
QoS
Use t his screen t o configure Wi- Fi Mult im edia Qualit y of Service ( WMM
QoS) . WMM QoS allows you t o priorit ize wireless t raffic according t o t he
delivery requirem ent s of individual services.
WPS
Use t his screen t o configure WPS.
WPS St at ion
Use t his screen t o add a wireless st at ion using WPS.
Scheduling
Use t his screen t o schedule t he t im es t he Wireless LAN is enabled.
I nt ernet
Connect ion
This screen allows you t o configure I SP param et ers, WAN I P address
assignm ent , DNS servers and t he WAN MAC address.
Advanced
Use t his screen t o configure ot her advanced propert ies.
IP
Use t his screen t o configure LAN I P address and subnet m ask.
I P Alias
Use t his screen t o have t he Rout er apply I P alias t o creat e LAN subnet s.
General
Use t his screen t o enable t he Rout er’s DHCP server.
Advanced
Use t his screen t o assign I P addresses t o specific individual com put ers
based on t heir MAC addresses and t o have DNS servers assigned by t he
DHCP server.
General
Use t his screen t o enable NAT.
Applicat ion
Use t his screen t o configure servers behind t he Rout er.
Advanced
Use t his screen t o change your Rout er’s port t riggering set t ings.
DDNS
General
Use t his screen t o set up dynam ic DNS.
St at ic Rout e
I P St at ic
Rout e
Use t his screen t o configure I P st at ic rout es.
General
Use t his screen t o act ivat e/ deact ivat e t he firewall.
Services
This screen shows a sum m ary of t he firewall rules, and allows you t o edit /
add a firewall rule.
Wireless LAN
2.4G
Wireless LAN
5G
WAN
LAN
DHCP Server
NAT
Securit y
Firewall
Cont ent Filt er
Use t his screen t o block cert ain web feat ures and sit es cont aining cert ain
keywords in t he URL.
Managem ent
62
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Router Mode
Table 27 Navigat ion Panel: Rout er Mode ( cont inued)
LINK
TAB
FUNCTION
General
Use t his screen t o enable bandwidt h m anagem ent .
Advanced
Use t his screen t o set t he upst ream bandwidt h and edit a bandwidt h
m anagem ent rule.
Monit or
Use t his screen t o view t he am ount of net work bandwidt h t hat applicat ions
running in t he net work are using.
Rem ot e
Managem ent
WWW
Use t his screen t o be able t o access t he Rout er from t he LAN, WAN or bot h.
UPnP
General
Use t his screen t o enable UPnP on t he Rout er.
Bandwidt h
Managem ent
M AI N TEN AN CE
General
Use t his screen t o view and change adm inist rat ive set t ings such as syst em
and dom ain nam es.
Password
Password
Set up
Use t his screen t o change t he password of your Rout er.
Tim e
Tim e Set t ing
Use t his screen t o change your Rout er’s t im e and dat e.
Firm ware
Upgrade
Use t his screen t o upload firm ware t o your Rout er.
Backup/
Rest ore
Use t his screen t o backup and rest ore t he configurat ion or reset t he fact ory
default s t o your Rout er.
Rest art
This screen allows you t o reboot t he Rout er wit hout t urning t he power off.
Sys OP Mode
This screen allows you t o select whet her your device act s as a Rout er or a
Access Point .
NBG6503 User’s Guide
63
Chapter 7 Router Mode
64
NBG6503 User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Access Point Mode
8.1 Overview
Use your Rout er as an access point ( AP) if you already have a rout er or gat eway on your net work.
I n t his m ode your Rout er bridges a wired net work ( LAN) and wireless LAN ( WLAN) in t he sam e
subnet . See t he figure below for an exam ple.
Figure 44 Wireless I nt ernet Access in Access Point Mode
Rou t e r
Many screens t hat are available in Rout er m ode are not available in Access Point m ode, such as
bandwidt h m anagem ent and firewall.
Not e: See Chapt er 9 on page 73 for an exam ple of set t ing up a wireless net work in
Access Point m ode.
8.2 What You Can Do
• Use t he St a t u s screen ( Sect ion 8.4 on page 68) t o view read- only inform at ion about your
Rout er.
• Use t he LAN screen ( Sect ion 8.5 on page 70) t o set t he I P address for your Rout er act ing as an
access point .
8.3 What You Need to Know
See Chapt er 9 on page 73 for a t ut orial on set t ing up a net work wit h t he Rout er as an access point .
NBG6503 User’s Guide
65
Chapter 8 Access Point Mode
8.3.1 Setting your Router to AP Mode
Log int o t he Web Configurat or if you haven’t already. See t he Quick st art Guide for inst ruct ions on
how t o do t his.
To use your Rout er as an access point , go t o M a int e n a n ce > Sys OP M ode and select Acce ss
Point m ode .
Figure 45 Changing t o Access Point m ode
Not e: You have t o log in t o t he Web Configurat or again when you change m odes. As soon
as you do, your Rout er is already in Access Point m ode.
When you select Acce ss Point M ode , t he following pop- up m essage window appears.
Figure 46 Pop up for Access Point m ode
Click OK.
Click Apply. The Web Configurat or refreshes once t he change t o Access Point m ode is successful.
8.3.2 Accessing the Web Configurator in Access Point Mode
Log in t o t he Web Configurat or in Access Point m ode, do t he following:
66
Connect your com put er t o t he LAN port of t he Rout er.
The default I P address of t he Rout er is “ 192.168.1.2”. I n t his case, your com put er m ust have an I P
address in t he range bet ween “ 192.168.1.3” and “ 192.168.1.254”.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Access Point Mode
Click St a r t > Run on your com put er in Windows. Type “ cm d” in t he dialog box. Ent er “ ipconfig” t o
show your com put er ’s I P address. I f your com put er ’s I P address is not in t he correct range t hen see
Appendix B on page 181 for inform at ion on changing your com put er ’s I P address.
Aft er you’ve set your com put er ’s I P address, open a web browser such as I nt ernet Explorer and
t ype “ 192.168.1.2” as t he web address in your web browser.
Not e: Aft er clicking Login, t he Easy m ode appears. Refer t o page 45 for t he Easy m ode
screens. Change t o Expert m ode t o see t he scr eens described in t he sect ions
following t his.
8.3.3 Configuring your WLAN, Bandwidth Management and Maintenance
Settings
The configurat ion of wireless, bandwidt h m anagem ent and m aint enance set t ings in Acce ss Point
m ode is t he sam e as for Rout e r M ode .
• See Chapt er 10 on page 83 for inform at ion on t he configuring your wireless net work.
• See Chapt er 19 on page 137 for inform at ion on configuring your Bandwidt h Managem ent screen.
• See Chapt er 22 on page 155 t o Chapt er 22 on page 155 for inform at ion on configuring your
Maint enance set t ings.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
67
Chapter 8 Access Point Mode
8.4 AP Mode Status Screen
Click
t o open t he St a t us screen.
Figure 47 St at us Screen: Access Point Mode
The following t able describes t he labels shown in t he St a t u s screen.
Table 28 St at us Screen: Access Point Mode
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Logout
Click t his at any t im e t o exit t he Web Configurat or.
Device I nform at ion
Host Nam e
This is t he Syst e m N a m e you ent er in t he M a in t e n a n ce > Ge n e r a l screen. I t is for
ident ificat ion purposes.
Firm ware Version
This is t he firm ware version and t he dat e creat ed.
Sys OP Mode
This is t he device m ode ( Sect ion 5.1.2 on page 43) t o which t he Rout er is set - Acce ss
Point M ode .
LAN I nform at ion
- MAC Address
This shows t he LAN Et hernet adapt er MAC Address of your device.
- I P Address
This shows t he LAN port ’s I P address.
- I P Subnet Mask
This shows t he LAN port ’s subnet m ask.
- Default Gat eway
This shows t he LAN Et hernet default gat eway of your device.
- DHCP
This shows t he LAN port ’s DHCP role - Se r ve r , Clie n t or N on e .
68
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Access Point Mode
Table 28 St at us Screen: Access Point Mode ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WLAN 2.4G I nform at ion
- WLAN OP Mode
This is t he device m ode ( Sect ion 5.1.2 on page 43) t o which t he Rout er’s wireless LAN is set
- Acce ss Poin t M ode .
- MAC Address
This shows t he wireless adapt er MAC Address of your device.
- SSI D
This shows a descript ive nam e used t o ident ify t he Rout er in t he wireless 2.4G LAN.
- Channel
This shows t he channel num ber which you select m anually.
- Securit y
This shows t he level of wireless securit y t he Rout er is using.
WLAN 5G I nform at ion
- MAC Address
This shows t he wireless adapt er MAC Address of your device.
- SSI D
This shows a descript ive nam e used t o ident ify t he Rout er in t he wireless 5G LAN.
- Channel
This shows t he channel num ber which you select m anually.
- Securit y
This shows t he level of wireless securit y t he Rout er is using.
Syst em St at us
I t em
This colum n shows t he t ype of dat a t he Rout er is recording.
Dat a
This colum n shows t he act ual dat a recorded by t he Rout er.
Syst em Up Tim e
This is t he t ot al t im e t he Rout er has been on.
Current Dat e/ Tim e
This field displays your Rout er’s present dat e and t im e.
Syst em Resource
- CPU Usage
This displays what percent age of t he Rout er’s processing abilit y is current ly used. When t his
percent age is close t o 100% , t he Rout er is running at full load, and t he t hroughput is not
going t o im prove anym ore. I f you want som e applicat ions t o have m ore t hroughput , you
should t urn off ot her applicat ions ( for exam ple, using bandwidt h m anagem ent .
- Mem ory Usage
This shows what percent age of t he heap m em ory t he Rout er is using.
Syst em Set t ing
- Configurat ion Mode
This shows t he web configurat or m ode you are viewing - Ex pe r t .
I nt erface St at us
I nt erface
This displays t he Rout er port t ypes. The port t ypes are: LAN , W LAN 2 .4 G, and W LAN 5 G.
St at us
For t he LAN and WAN port s, t his field displays D ow n ( line is down) or Up ( line is up or
connect ed) .
For t he WLAN, it displays Up when t he WLAN is enabled or D ow n when t he WLAN is
disabled.
Rat e
For t he LAN port s, t his displays t he port speed and duplex set t ing or N / A when t he line is
disconnect ed.
For t he WAN port , it displays t he port speed and duplex set t ing if you’re using Et hernet
encapsulat ion and I dle ( line ( ppp) idle) , D ia l ( st art ing t o t rigger a call) and D r op ( dropping
a call) if you're using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulat ion. This field displays N / A when t he line is
disconnect ed.
For t he WLAN, it displays t he m axim um t ransm ission rat e when t he WLAN is enabled and N /
A when t he WLAN is disabled.
Sum m ary
Packet St at ist ics
Click D e t a ils... t o go t o t he M on it or > Pa ck e t St a t ist ics screen ( Sect ion 4.6 on page 40) .
Use t his screen t o view port st at us and packet specific st at ist ics.
WLAN St at ion St at us
Click D e t a ils... t o go t o t he M on it or > W LAN 2 .4 G / 5 G St a t ion St a t u s screen ( Sect ion
4.8 on page 41) . Use t his screen t o view t he wireless st at ions t hat are current ly associat ed
t o t he Rout er.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
69
Chapter 8 Access Point Mode
8.4.0.1 Navigation Panel
Use t he m enu in t he navigat ion panel t o configure Rout er feat ures in Access Point m ode.
The following screen and t able show t he feat ures you can configure in Access Point m ode.
Figure 48 Menu: Access Point Mode
Refer t o Table 27 on page 61 for descript ions of t he labels shown in t he N a viga t ion panel.
8.5 LAN Screen
Use t his sect ion t o configure your LAN set t ings while in Acce ss Poin t m ode.
Click N e t w or k > LAN t o see t he screen below.
Not e: I f you change t he I P address of t he Rout er in t he screen below, you will need t o log
int o t he Rout er again using t he new I P address.
Figure 49 Net work > LAN > I P
The t able below describes t he labels in t he screen.
70
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Access Point Mode
Table 29 Net work > LAN > I P
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Get from DHCP
Server
Click t his t o deploy t he Rout er as an access point in t he net work.
When you enable t his, t he Rout er get s it s I P address from t he net work’s DHCP server ( for
exam ple, your I SP) . Users connect ed t o t he Rout er can now access t he net work ( i.e., t he
I nt ernet if t he I P address is given by t he I SP) .
The Web Configurat or m ay no longer be accessible unless you know t he I P address assigned
by t he DHCP server t o t he Rout er. You need t o reset t he Rout er t o be able t o access t he Web
Configurat or again ( see Sect ion 22.7 on page 160 for det ails on how t o reset t he Rout er) .
Also when you select t his, you cannot ent er an I P address for your Rout er in t he field below.
Use Defined
LAN I P Address
Click t his if you want t o specify t he I P address of your Rout er. Or if your I SP or net work
adm inist rat or gave you a st at ic I P address t o access t he net work or t he I nt ernet .
I P Address
Type t he I P address in dot t ed decim al not at ion. The default set t ing is 192.168.1.2. I f you
change t he I P address you will have t o log in again wit h t he new I P address.
I P Subnet Mask
The subnet m ask specifies t he net work num ber port ion of an I P address. Your Rout er will
aut om at ically calculat e t he subnet m ask based on t he I P address t hat you assign. Unless
you are im plem ent ing subnet t ing, use t he subnet m ask com put ed by t he Rout er.
Gat eway I P
Address
Ent er a Ga t e w a y I P Addr e ss ( if your I SP or net work adm inist rat or gave you one) in t his
field.
DNS Assignm ent
First DNS
Server
Second DNS
Server
Select Fr om I SP if your I SP dynam ically assigns DNS server inform at ion ( and t he Rout er's
WAN I P address) . The field t o t he right displays t he ( read- only) DNS server I P address t hat
t he I SP assigns.
Select Use r - D e fin e d if you have t he I P address of a DNS server. Ent er t he DNS server's I P
address in t he field t o t he right . I f you chose Use r - D e fin e d, but leave t he I P address set t o
0.0.0.0, Use r - D e fin e d changes t o N on e aft er you click Apply. I f you set a second choice t o
Use r - D e fin e d, and ent er t he sam e I P address, t he second Use r - D e fine d changes t o N on e
aft er you click Apply.
Select N on e if you do not want t o configure DNS servers. I f you do not configure a DNS
server, you m ust know t he I P address of a com put er in order t o access it .
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes t o t he Rout er.
Reset
Click Re se t t o reload t he previous configurat ion for t his screen.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
71
C HAPT ER
Tutorials
9.1 Overview
This chapt er provides t ut orials for your Rout er as follows:
• Connect ing t o t he I nt ernet from an Access Point
• Configuring Wireless Securit y Using WPS
• Enabling and Configuring Wireless Securit y ( No WPS)
• I f your connect ion is successful, open your I nt ernet browser and ent er ht t p: / / www.zyxel.com or
t he URL of any ot her web sit e in t he address bar. I f you are able t o access t he web sit e, your
wireless connect ion is successfully configured.
9.2 Connecting to the Internet from an Access Point
This sect ion gives you an exam ple of how t o set up an access point ( AP) and wireless client ( a
not ebook ( B) , in t his exam ple) for wireless com m unicat ion. B can access t he I nt ernet t hrough t he
access point wirelessly.
Figure 50 Wireless Access Point Connect ion t o t he I nt ernet
9.3 Configuring Wireless Security Using WPS
This sect ion gives you an exam ple of how t o set up wireless net work using WPS. This exam ple uses
t he Rout er as t he AP and NWD210N as t he wireless client which connect s t o a not ebook.
Not e: The wireless client m ust be a WPS- aware device ( for exam ple, a WPS USB adapt er
or PCI card) .
There are t wo WPS m et hods for creat ing a secure connect ion. This t ut orial shows you how t o do
bot h.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
73
Chapter 9 Tutorials
• Push Bu t t on Configu r a t ion ( PBC) - creat e a secure wireless net work sim ply by pressing a
but t on. See Sect ion 9.3.1 on page 74.This is t he easier m et hod.
• PI N Con figu r a t ion - creat e a secure wireless net work sim ply by ent ering a wireless client 's PI N
( Personal I dent ificat ion Num ber) in t he Rout er’s int erface. See Sect ion 9.3.2 on page 75. This is
t he m ore secure m et hod, since one device can aut hent icat e t he ot her.
9.3.1 Push Button Configuration (PBC)
Make sure t hat your Rout er is t urned on and t hat it is wit hin range of your com put er.
Make sure t hat you have inst alled t he wireless client ( t his exam ple uses t he NWD210N) driver and
ut ilit y in your not ebook.
I n t he wireless client ut ilit y, find t he WPS set t ings. Enable WPS and press t he WPS but t on ( St a r t or
W PS but t on)
Log int o Rout er’s Web Configurat or and press t he Pu sh Bu t t on but t on in t he N e t w or k > W ir e le ss
LAN 2 .4 G or W ir e le ss LAN 5 G > W PS St a t ion screen.
Not e: Your Rout er has a WPS but t on locat ed on it s panel, as well as a WPS but t on in it s
configurat ion ut ilit y. Bot h but t ons have exact ly t he sam e funct ion; you can use one
or t he ot her.
Not e: I t doesn’t m at t er which but t on is pressed first . You m ust press t he second but t on
wit hin t w o m inut es of pressing t he first one.
The Rout er sends t he proper configurat ion set t ings t o t he wireless client . This m ay t ake up t o t wo
m inut es. Then t he wireless client is able t o com m unicat e wit h t he Rout er securely.
74
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Tutorials
The following figure shows you an exam ple t o set up wireless net work and securit y by pressing a
but t on on bot h Rout er and wireless client ( t he NWD210N in t his exam ple) .
Figure 51 Exam ple WPS Process: PBC Met hod
Router
Wireless Client
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
9.3.2 PIN Configuration
When you use t he PI N configurat ion m et hod, you need t o use bot h Rout er’s configurat ion int erface
and t he client ’s ut ilit ies.
Launch your wireless client ’s configurat ion ut ilit y. Go t o t he WPS set t ings and select t he PI N m et hod
t o get a PI N num ber.
Ent er t he PI N num ber t o t he PI N field in t he N e t w or k > W ir e le ss LAN 2 .4 G or W ir e le ss LAN
5 G > W PS St a t ion screen on t he Rout er.
Click St a r t but t on ( or but t on next t o t he PI N field) on bot h t he wireless client ut ilit y screen and t he
Rout er’s W PS St a t ion screen wit hin t wo m inut es.
The Rout er aut hent icat es t he wireless client and sends t he proper configurat ion set t ings t o t he
wireless client . This m ay t ake up t o t wo m inut es. Then t he wireless client is able t o com m unicat e
wit h t he Rout er securely.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
75
Chapter 9 Tutorials
The following figure shows you t he exam ple t o set up wireless net work and securit y on Rout er and
wireless client ( ex. NWD210N in t his exam ple) by using PI N m et hod.
Figure 52 Exam ple WPS Process: PI N Met hod
Wireless Client
Router
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
Authentication by PIN
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
76
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Tutorials
9.4 Enabling and Configuring Wireless Security (No WPS)
This exam ple shows you how t o configure wireless securit y set t ings wit h t he following param et ers
on your Rout er.
SSI D
SSI D_Exam ple3
Ch a n n e l
Se cu r it y
WPA- PSK
( Pre- Shared Key: Thisism yWPA- PSKpre- sharedkey)
Follow t he st eps below t o configure t he wireless set t ings on your Rout er.
The inst ruct ions require t hat your hardware is connect ed ( see t he Quick St art Guide) and you are
logged int o t he Web Configurat or t hrough your LAN connect ion ( see Sect ion 3.2 on page 31) .
Open t he W ir e le ss LAN > Ge n e r a l screen in t he AP’s Web Configurat or.
Enable W ir e le ss LAN .
Ent er SSI D _ Ex a m ple 3 as t he SSI D and select a channel.
Set securit y m ode t o W PA- PSK and ent er Thisism yW PA- PSKpr e - sha r e dk e y in t he Pr e - Sha r e d
Ke y field. Click Apply.
Figure 53 Tut orial: Net work > Wireless LAN > General
NBG6503 User’s Guide
77
Chapter 9 Tutorials
Open t he St a t us screen. Verify your wireless and wireless securit y set t ings under D e vice
I nfor m a t ion and check if t he WLAN connect ion is up under I nt e r fa ce St a t us.
Figure 54 Tut orial: Checking Wireless Set t ings
9.4.1 Configure Your Notebook
Not e: We use t he ZyXEL M- 302 wireless adapt er ut ilit y screens as an exam ple for t he
wireless client . The screens m ay vary for different m odels.
The Rout er support s I EEE 802.11b, I EEE 802.11g, I EEE 802.11n and I EEE 802.11ac wireless
client s. Make sure t hat your not ebook or com put er ’s wireless adapt er support s one of t hese
st andards.
Wireless adapt ers com e wit h soft ware som et im es called a “ ut ilit y” t hat you inst all on your
com put er. See your wireless adapt er ’s User ’s Guide for inform at ion on how t o do t hat .
Aft er you’ve inst alled t he ut ilit y, open it . I f you cannot see your ut ilit y’s icon on your screen, go t o
St a r t > Pr ogr a m s and click on your ut ilit y in t he list of program s t hat appears. The ut ilit y displays
a list of APs wit hin range, as shown in t he exam ple screen below.
Select SSI D_Exam ple3 and click Conne ct .
Figure 55 Connect ing a Wireless Client t o a Wireless Net work t
78
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Tutorials
Select WPA- PSK and t ype t he securit y key in t he following screen. Click N e x t .
Figure 56 Securit y Set t ings
The Confir m Sa ve window appears. Check your set t ings and click Sa ve t o cont inue.
Figure 57 Confirm Save
Check t he st at us of your wireless connect ion in t he screen below. I f your wireless connect ion is
weak or you have no connect ion, see t he Troubleshoot ing sect ion of t his User ’s Guide.
Figure 58 Link St at us
I f your connect ion is successful, open your I nt ernet browser and ent er ht t p: / / www.zyxel.com or t he
URL of any ot her web sit e in t he address bar. I f you are able t o access t he web sit e, your wireless
connect ion is successfully configured.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
79
Chapter 9 Tutorials
80
NBG6503 User’s Guide
P ART II
Technical Reference
81
82
C HAPTER
10
Wireless LAN
10.1 Overview
This chapt er discusses how t o configure t he wireless net work set t ings in your Rout er. See t he
appendices for m ore det ailed inform at ion about wireless net works.
The following figure provides an exam ple of a wireless net work.
Figure 59 Exam ple of a Wireless Net work
Router
2.4G
5G
The wireless 2.4G net work is t he part in t he blue circle and wireless 5G net work is t he part in t he
green circle. I n t hese wireless net works, devices A, B and C are called wireless client s. The wireless
client s use t he access point ( AP) t o int eract wit h ot her devices ( such as t he print er) or wit h t he
I nt ernet .
10.2 What You Can Do
• Use t he Ge n e r a l screen ( Sect ion 10.4 on page 86) t o enable t he Wireless LAN, ent er t he SSI D
and select t he wireless securit y m ode.
• Use t he M AC Filt e r screen ( Sect ion 10.5 on page 90) t o allow or deny wireless st at ions based
on t heir MAC addresses from connect ing t o t he Rout er.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
83
Chapter 10 Wireless LAN
• Use t he Adva nce d screen ( Sect ion 10.6 on page 91) t o allow wireless advanced feat ures, such
as int ra- BSS net working and set t he RTS/ CTS Threshold.
• Use t he QoS screen ( Sect ion 10.7 on page 93) t o set priorit y levels t o services, such as e- m ail,
VoI P, chat , and so on.
• Use t he W PS screen ( Sect ion 10.8 on page 94) t o quickly set up a wireless net work wit h st rong
securit y, wit hout having t o configure securit y set t ings m anually.
• Use t he W PS St a t ion screen ( Sect ion 10.9 on page 95) t o add a wireless st at ion using WPS.
• Use t he Sche duling screen ( Sect ion 10.10 on page 96) t o set t he t im es your wireless LAN is
t urned on and off.
• Use t he W D S screen ( Sect ion 10.11 on page 97) t o configure Wireless Dist ribut ion Syst em on
your Rout er.
10.3 What You Should Know
Every wireless net work m ust follow t hese basic guidelines.
• Every wireless client in t he sam e wireless net work m ust use t he sam e SSI D.
The SSI D is t he nam e of t he wireless net work. I t st ands for Service Set I Dent it y.
• I f t wo wireless net works overlap, t hey should use different channels.
Like radio st at ions or t elevision channels, each wireless net work uses a specific channel, or
frequency, t o send and receive inform at ion.
• Every wireless client in t he sam e wireless net work m ust use securit y com pat ible wit h t he AP.
Securit y st ops unaut horized devices from using t he wireless net work. I t can also prot ect t he
inform at ion t hat is sent in t he wireless net work.
10.3.1 Wireless Security Overview
The following sect ions int roduce different t ypes of wireless securit y you can set up in t he wireless
net work.
10.3.1.1 SSID
Norm ally, t he AP act s like a beacon and regularly broadcast s t he SSI D in t he area. You can hide t he
SSI D inst ead, in which case t he AP does not broadcast t he SSI D. I n addit ion, you should change
t he default SSI D t o som et hing t hat is difficult t o guess.
This t ype of securit y is fairly weak, however, because t here are ways for unaut horized devices t o
get t he SSI D. I n addit ion, unaut horized devices can st ill see t he inform at ion t hat is sent in t he
wireless net work.
10.3.1.2 MAC Address Filter
Every wireless client has a unique ident ificat ion num ber, called a MAC address. 1 A MAC address is
usually writ t en using t welve hexadecim al charact ers2 ; for exam ple, 00A0C5000002 or
84
1.
Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds
of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses.
2.
Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Wireless LAN
00: A0: C5: 00: 00: 02. To get t he MAC address for each wireless client , see t he appropriat e User ’s
Guide or ot her docum ent at ion.
You can use t he MAC address filt er t o t ell t he AP which wireless client s are allowed or not allowed t o
use t he wireless net work. I f a wireless client is allowed t o use t he wireless net work, it st ill has t o
have t he correct set t ings ( SSI D, channel, and securit y) . I f a wireless client is not allowed t o use t he
wireless net work, it does not m at t er if it has t he correct set t ings.
This t ype of securit y does not prot ect t he inform at ion t hat is sent in t he wireless net work.
Furt herm ore, t here are ways for unaut horized devices t o get t he MAC address of an aut horized
wireless client . Then, t hey can use t hat MAC address t o use t he wireless net work.
10.3.1.3 Encryption
Wireless net works can use encrypt ion t o prot ect t he inform at ion t hat is sent in t he wireless
net work. Encrypt ion is like a secret code. I f you do not know t he secret code, you cannot
underst and t he m essage.
The t ypes of encrypt ion you can choose depend on t he t ype of user aut hent icat ion.
Table 30 Types of Encrypt ion for Each Type of Aut hent icat ion
NO AUTHENTICATION
W e a k e st
No Securit y
WEP
WPA- PSK
St r on ge st
WPA2- PSK
Usually, you should set up t he st rongest encrypt ion t hat every wireless client in t he wireless
net work support s. Suppose t he wireless net work has t wo wireless client s. Device A only support s
WEP, and device B support s WEP and WPA- PSK. Therefore, you should set up W EP in t he wireless
net work.
Not e: I t is recom m ended t hat w ireless net works use W PA- PSK or st ronger encrypt ion.
I EEE 802.1x and WEP encrypt ion are bet t er t han none at all, but it is st ill possible
for unaut horized devices t o figure out t he original inform at ion pret t y quickly.
When you select W PA2 - PSK in your Rout er, you can also select an opt ion ( W PA Com pa t ible ) t o
support WPA as well. I n t his case, if som e wireless client s support WPA and som e support WPA2,
you should set up W PA2 - PSK ( depending on t he t ype of wireless net work login) and select t he
W PA Com pa t ible opt ion in t he Rout er.
Many t ypes of encrypt ion use a key t o prot ect t he inform at ion in t he wireless net work. The longer
t he key, t he st ronger t he encrypt ion. Every wireless client in t he wireless net work m ust have t he
sam e key.
10.3.1.4 WPS
WiFi Prot ect ed Set up ( WPS) is an indust ry st andard specificat ion, defined by t he WiFi Alliance. WPS
allows you t o quickly set up a wireless net work wit h st rong securit y, wit hout having t o configure
securit y set t ings m anually. Depending on t he devices in your net work, you can eit her press a
but t on ( on t he device it self, or in it s configurat ion ut ilit y) or ent er a PI N ( Personal I dent ificat ion
Num ber) in t he devices. Then, t hey connect and set up a secure net work by t hem selves. See how
t o set up a secure wireless net work using WPS in t he Sect ion 9.3 on page 73.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
85
Chapter 10 Wireless LAN
10.3.1.5 WDS
Wireless Dist ribut ion Syst em or WDS securit y is used bet ween bridged APs. I t is independent of t he
securit y bet ween t he wired net works and t heir respect ive APs. I f you do not enable WDS securit y,
t raffic bet ween APs is not encrypt ed. When WDS securit y is enabled, bot h APs m ust use t he sam e
pre- shared key.
10.4 General Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G Screen
Use t his screen t o enable t he Wireless LAN 2.4G or 5G, ent er t he SSI D and select t he wireless
securit y m ode.
Not e: I f you are configur ing t he Rout er from a com put er connect ed t o t he wireless LAN
and you change t he Rout er’s SSI D, channel or securit y set t ings, you will lose your
wireless connect ion when you press Apply t o confirm . You m ust t hen change t he
wireless set t ings of your com put er t o m at ch t he Rout er’s new set t ings.
Click N e t w or k > W ir e le ss LAN 2 .4 G or W ir e le ss LAN 5 G t o open t he Ge ne r a l screen.
Figure 60 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G > General
The following t able describes t he general wireless LAN labels in t his screen.
Table 31 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Set up
Wireless LAN
Select t he radio but t on t o En a ble or D isa ble W ir e le ss LAN .
You can t urn t he wireless LAN on or off using t he swit ch at t he rear panel of t he Rout er.
86
Net work
Nam e( SSI D)
( Service Set I Dent it y) The SSI D ident ifies t he Service Set wit h which a wireless st at ion is
associat ed. Wireless st at ions associat ing t o t he Rout er m ust have t he sam e SSI D. Ent er a
descript ive nam e ( up t o 32 keyboard charact ers) for t he wireless LAN.
Hide SSI D
Select t his check box t o hide t he SSI D in t he out going beacon fram e so a st at ion cannot
obt ain t he SSI D t hrough scanning using a sit e survey t ool.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Wireless LAN
Table 31 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G > General ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Channel
Select ion
Set t he operat ing frequency/ channel depending on your part icular region.
Select a channel from t he drop- down list box. The opt ions vary depending on t he frequency
band and t he count ry you are in.
Refer t o t he Connect ion Wizard chapt er for m ore inform at ion on channels. This opt ion is
only available if Au t o Ch a n n e l Se le ct ion is disabled.
Operat ing
Channel
This displays t he channel t he Rout er is current ly using.
Securit y
Securit y Mode
Select W EP, W PA, W PA2 , W PA- PSK or W PA2 - PSK t o add securit y on t his wireless
net work. The wireless client s which want t o associat e t o t his net work m ust have sam e
wireless securit y set t ings as t he Rout er. Aft er you select t o use a securit y, addit ional opt ions
appears in t his screen. See 10.4.2, and 10.4.3 sect ions.
Or you can select N o Se cu r it y t o allow any client t o associat e t his net work wit hout
aut hent icat ion.
Note: If you enable the WPS function, only No Security, Static WEP, WPA-PSK and WPA2PSK are available in this field.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Reset
Click Re se t t o reload t he previous configurat ion for t his screen.
See t he rest of t his chapt er for inform at ion on t he ot her labels in t his screen.
10.4.1 No Security
Select N o Se cur it y t o allow wireless st at ions t o com m unicat e wit h t he access point s wit hout any
dat a encrypt ion.
Not e: I f you do not enable any wireless securit y on your Rout er, your net work is
accessible t o any wireless net working device t hat is wit hin range.
Figure 61 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G > General: No Securit y
NBG6503 User’s Guide
87
Chapter 10 Wireless LAN
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 32 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G > General: No Securit y
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Securit y Mode
Choose N o Se cur it y from t he drop- down list box.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l t o reload t he previous configurat ion for t his screen.
Refer t o Table 31 on page 86 for descript ions of t he ot her labels in t his screen.
10.4.2 WEP Encryption
WEP encrypt ion scram bles t he dat a t ransm it t ed bet ween t he wireless st at ions and t he access point s
t o keep net work com m unicat ions privat e. I t encrypt s unicast and m ult icast com m unicat ions in a
net work. Bot h t he wireless st at ions and t he access point s m ust use t he sam e WEP key.
Your Rout er allows you t o configure up t o four 64- bit or 128- bit WEP keys but only one key can be
enabled at any one t im e.
I n order t o configure and enable WEP encrypt ion, click N e t w or k > W ir e le ss LAN 2 .4 G or
W ir e le ss LAN 5 G t o display t he Ge n e r a l screen. Select St a t ic W EP from t he Se cu r it y M ode list .
Figure 62 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G > General: St at ic WEP
88
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Wireless LAN
The following t able describes t he wireless LAN securit y labels in t his screen.
Table 33 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G > General: St at ic WEP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Securit y Mode
Select St a t ic W EP t o enable dat a encrypt ion.
PassPhrase
Ent er a Passphrase ( up t o 26 print able charact ers) and click Generat e.
A passphrase funct ions like a password. I n WEP securit y m ode, it is furt her convert ed by t he
Rout er int o a com plicat ed st ring t hat is referred t o as t he “ key”. This key is request ed from
all devices wishing t o connect t o a wireless net work.
WEP Encrypt ion
Select 6 4 - bit W EP or 1 2 8 - bit W EP.
Aut hent icat ion
Met hod
Select Au t o or Sh a r e d Ke y from t he drop- down list box.
This dict at es t he lengt h of t he securit y key t hat t he net work is going t o use.
This field specifies whet her t he wireless client s have t o provide t he WEP key t o login t o t he
wireless client . Keep t his set t ing at Au t o unless you want t o force a key verificat ion before
com m unicat ion bet ween t he wireless client and t he Rout er occurs.
Select Sh a r e d Ke y t o force t he client s t o provide t he WEP key prior t o com m unicat ion.
ASCI I
Select t his opt ion in order t o ent er ASCI I charact ers as WEP key.
Hex
Select t his opt ion in order t o ent er hexadecim al charact ers as a WEP key.
The preceding " 0x" , t hat ident ifies a hexadecim al key, is ent ered aut om at ically.
Key 1 t o Key 4
The WEP keys are used t o encrypt dat a. Bot h t he Rout er and t he wireless st at ions m ust use
t he sam e WEP key for dat a t ransm ission.
I f you chose 6 4 - bit W EP, t hen ent er any 5 ASCI I charact ers or 10 hexadecim al charact ers
( " 0- 9" , " A- F" ) .
I f you chose 1 2 8 - bit W EP, t hen ent er 13 ASCI I charact ers or 26 hexadecim al charact ers
( " 0- 9" , " A- F" ) .
You m ust configure at least one key, only one key can be act ivat ed at any one t im e.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l t o reload t he previous configurat ion for t his screen.
Refer t o Table 31 on page 86 for descript ions of t he ot her labels in t his screen.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
89
Chapter 10 Wireless LAN
10.4.3 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
Click N e t w or k > W ir e le ss LAN 2 .4 G or W ir e le ss LAN 5 G t o display t he Ge n e r a l screen. Select
W PA- PSK or W PA2 - PSK from t he Se cu r it y M ode list .
Figure 63 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G> General: WPA- PSK/ WPA2- PSK
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 34 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G > General: WPA- PSK/ WPA2- PSK
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Securit y Mode
Select W PA- PSK or W PA2 - PSK t o enable dat a encrypt ion.
WPA- PSK
Com pat ible
This field appears when you choose W PA- PSK2 as t he Se cu r it y M ode .
Pre- Shared Key
Check t his field t o allow wireless devices using W PA- PSK securit y m ode t o connect t o your
Rout er.
W PA- PSK/ W PA2 - PSK uses a sim ple com m on password for aut hent icat ion.
Type a pre- shared key from 8 t o 63 case- sensit ive keyboard charact ers.
Group Key
Updat e Tim er
The Gr ou p Ke y Upda t e Tim e r is t he rat e at which t he AP sends a new group key out t o all
client s.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l t o reload t he previous configurat ion for t his screen.
Refer t o Table 31 on page 86 for descript ions of t he ot her labels in t his screen.
10.5 MAC Filter
The MAC filt er screen allows you t o configure t he Rout er t o give exclusive access t o devices ( Allow)
or exclude devices from accessing t he Rout er ( Deny) . Every Et hernet device has a unique MAC
( Media Access Cont rol) address. The MAC address is assigned at t he fact ory and consist s of six
90
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Wireless LAN
pairs of hexadecim al charact ers, for exam ple, 00: A0: C5: 00: 00: 02. You need t o know t he MAC
address of t he devices t o configure t his screen.
To change your Rout er’s MAC filt er set t ings, click N e t w or k > W ir e le ss LAN 2 .4 G or W ir e le ss
LAN 5 G > M AC Filt e r. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 64 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G > MAC Filt er
The following t able describes t he labels in t his m enu.
Table 35 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G > MAC Filt er
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Access Policy
Policy
Define t he filt er act ion for t he list of MAC addresses in t he M AC Addr e ss t able.
Select Allow t o perm it access t o t he Rout er, MAC addresses not list ed will be denied
access t o t he Rout er.
Select Re j e ct t o block access t o t he Rout er, MAC addresses not list ed will be allowed t o
access t he Rout er
Add a st at ion
Mac Address
Ent er t he MAC addresses of t he wireless st at ion t hat are allowed or denied access t o t he
Rout er in t hese address fields. Ent er t he MAC addresses in a valid MAC address form at ,
t hat is, six hexadecim al charact er pairs, for exam ple, 12: 34: 56: 78: 9a: bc. Click Add.
MAC Filt er Sum m ary
Delet e
Click t he delet e icon t o rem ove t he MAC address from t he list .
MAC Address
This is t he MAC address of t he wireless st at ion t hat are allowed or denied access t o t he
Rout er.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l t o reload t he previous configurat ion for t his screen.
10.6 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen
Use t his screen t o allow wireless advanced feat ures, such as int ra- BSS net working and set t he
RTS/ CTS Threshold
NBG6503 User’s Guide
91
Chapter 10 Wireless LAN
Click N e t w or k > W ir e le ss LAN 2 .4 G or W ir e le ss LAN 5 G > Adva nce d. The screen appears as
shown.
Figure 65 Net work > Wireless LAN > Advanced
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 36 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G > Advanced
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
RTS/ CTS
Threshold
Dat a wit h it s fram e size larger t han t his value will perform t he RTS ( Request To Send) / CTS
( Clear To Send) handshake.
Fragm ent at ion
Threshold
The t hreshold ( num ber of byt es) for t he fragm ent at ion boundary for direct ed m essages. I t is
t he m axim um dat a fragm ent size t hat can be sent . Ent er an even num ber.
Enable I nt raBSS Traffic
A Basic Service Set ( BSS) exist s when all com m unicat ions bet ween wireless client s or
bet w een a wireless client and a wired net work client go t hrough one access point ( AP) .
I nt ra- BSS t raffic is t raffic bet ween wireless client s in t he BSS. When I nt ra- BSS is enabled,
wireless client A and B can access t he wired net work and com m unicat e wit h each ot her.
When I nt ra- BSS is disabled, wireless client A and B can st ill access t he wired net work but
cannot com m unicat e wit h each ot her.
Out put Pow er
Set t he out put power of t he Rout er in t his field. I f t here is a high densit y of APs in an area,
decrease t he out put power of t he Rout er t o reduce int erference wit h ot her APs. Select one of
t he following 1 0 0 % , 9 0 % , 7 5 % , 5 0 % , 2 5 % , 1 0 % or M in im u m . See t he product
specificat ions for m ore inform at ion on your Rout er’s out put power.
Net work Mode
( Wireless LAN
2.4G)
Select 1 1 b/ g m ix e d m ode t o allow I EEE802.11b and I EEE802.11g com pliant WLAN devices
t o associat e wit h t he Rout er.
Select 1 1 b on ly t o allow only I EEE 802.11b com pliant WLAN devices t o associat e wit h t he
Rout er.
Select 1 1 g on ly t o allow only I EEE 802.11g com pliant WLAN devices t o associat e wit h t he
Rout er.
Select 1 1 n on ly t o allow only I EEE 802.11n com pliant WLAN devices t o associat e wit h t he
Rout er.
Select 1 1 b/ g/ n m ix e d m ode t o allow I EEE802.11b, I EEE802.11g and I EEE802.11n
com pliant WLAN devices t o associat e wit h t he Rout er.
92
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Wireless LAN
Table 36 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G > Advanced ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Net work Mode
( Wireless LAN
5G)
Select 1 1 a / n m ix e d m ode t o allow I EEE802.11a and I EEE802.11n com pliant WLAN devices
t o associat e wit h t he Rout er.
Select 1 1 a only t o allow only I EEE 802.11a com pliant WLAN devices t o associat e wit h t he
Rout er.
Select 1 1 a / a n / a c t o allow only I EEE 802.11a, I EEE802.11an and I EEE802.11ac com pliant
WLAN devices t o associat e wit h t he Rout er.
HT ( High Throughput ) Physical Mode - Use t he fields below t o configure t he 802.11 wireless environm ent of
your Rout er.
Operat ing
Mode
Choose t his according t o t he wireless m ode( s) used in your net work.
M ix e d M ode - Select t his if t he wireless client s in your net work use different wireless m odes
( for exam ple, I EEE 802.11b/ g and I EEE 802.1n m odes)
Gr e e n M ode - Select t his if t he wireless client s in your net work uses only one t ype of
wireless m ode ( for exam ple, I EEEE 802.11 n only)
Channel
Bandw idt h
Select t he channel bandwidt h you want t o use for your wireless net work.
I t is recom m ended t hat you select 2 0 / 4 0 ( 20, 40, 20/ 40 MHz) .
Select 20 MHz if you want t o lessen radio int erference wit h ot her wireless devices in your
neighborhood.
Guard I nt erval
Select Au t o t o increase dat a t hroughput . However, t his m ay m ake dat a t ransfer m ore prone
t o errors.
Select Lon g t o priorit ize dat a int egrit y. This m ay be because your wireless net work is busy
and congest ed or t he Rout er is locat ed in an environm ent prone t o radio int erference.
Ext ension
Channel
This is set t o Au t o by default .
I f you select 2 0 / 4 0 as your Ch a n n e l Ba n dw idt h , t he ext ension channel enables t he Rout er
t o get higher dat a t hroughput . This also lowers radio int erference and t raffic.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l t o reload t he previous configurat ion for t his screen.
10.7 Quality of Service (QoS) Screen
The QoS screen allows you t o aut om at ically give a service ( such as VoI P and video) a priorit y level.
Click N e t w or k > W ir e le ss LAN 2 .4 G or W ir e le ss LAN 5 G > QoS. The following screen appears.
Figure 66 Net work > Wireless LAN > QoS
NBG6503 User’s Guide
93
Chapter 10 Wireless LAN
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 37 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G > QoS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable WMM
QoS
Check t his t o have t he Rout er aut om at ically give a service a priorit y level according t o t he
ToS value in t he I P header of packet s it sends. WMM QoS ( Wifi Mult iMedia Qualit y of
Service) gives high priorit y t o voice and video, which m akes t hem run m ore sm oot hly.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes t o t he Rout er.
Cancel
Click Ca nce l t o reload t he previous configurat ion for t his screen.
10.8 WPS Screen
Use t his screen t o enable/ disable WPS, view or generat e a new PI N num ber and check current WPS
st at us. To open t his screen, click N e t w or k > W ir e le ss LAN 2 .4 G or W ir e le ss LAN 5 G > W PS
t ab.
Figure 67 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G > WPS
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 38 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G > WPS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WPS Set up
Enable WPS
Select t his t o enable t he WPS feat ure.
PI N Num ber
This displays a PI N num ber last t im e syst em generat ed. Click Ge n e r a t e t o generat e a
new PI N num ber.
St at us
St at us
This displays Con figu r e d when t he Rout er has connect ed t o a wireless net work using
WPS or when En a ble W PS is select ed and wireless or wireless securit y set t ings have
been changed. The current wireless and wireless securit y set t ings also appear in t he
screen.
This displays Un con figu r e d if WPS is disabled and t here are no wireless or wireless
securit y changes on t he Rout er or you click Re le a se _ Con figur a t ion t o rem ove t he
configured wireless and wireless securit y set t ings.
94
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Wireless LAN
Table 38 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G > WPS ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Release
Configurat ion
This but t on is only available when t he WPS st at us displays Con figu r e d.
Click t his but t on t o rem ove all configured wireless and wireless securit y set t ings for WPS
connect ions on t he Rout er.
802.11 Mode
This is t he 802.11 m ode used. Only com pliant WLAN devices can associat e wit h t he
Rout er.
SSI D
This is t he nam e of t he wireless net work.
Securit y
This is t he t ype of wireless securit y em ployed by t he net work.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l t o reload t he previous configurat ion for t his screen.
10.9 WPS Station Screen
Use t his screen when you want t o add a wireless st at ion using WPS. To open t his screen, click
N e t w or k > W ir e le ss LAN 2 .4 G or W ir e le ss LAN 5 G > W PS St a t ion t ab.
Not e: Not e: Aft er you click Pu sh Bu t t on on t his screen, you have t o press a sim ilar
but t on in t he wireless st at ion ut ilit y wit hin 2 m inut es. To add t he second wireless
st at ion, you have t o pr ess t hese but t ons on bot h device and t he wireless st at ion
again aft er t he fir st 2 m inut es.
Figure 68 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G > WPS St at ion
NBG6503 User’s Guide
95
Chapter 10 Wireless LAN
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 39 Net work > Wireless LAN > WPS St at ion
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Push But t on
Use t his but t on when you use t he PBC ( Push But t on Configurat ion) m et hod t o configure
wireless st at ions’s wireless set t ings. See Sect ion 9.3.1 on page 74.
Click t his t o st art WPS- aware wireless st at ion scanning and t he wireless securit y inform at ion
synchronizat ion.
Or input
st at ion’s PI N
num ber
Use t his but t on when you use t he PI N Configurat ion m et hod t o configure wireless st at ion’s
wireless set t ings. See Sect ion 9.3.2 on page 75.
Type t he sam e PI N num ber generat ed in t he wireless st at ion’s ut ilit y. Then click St a r t t o
associat e t o each ot her and perform t he wireless securit y inform at ion synchronizat ion.
10.10 Scheduling Screen
Use t his screen t o set t he t im es your wireless LAN is t urned on and off. Wireless LAN scheduling is
disabled by default . The wireless LAN can be scheduled t o t urn on or off on cert ain days and at
cert ain t im es. To open t his screen, click N e t w or k > W ir e le ss LAN 2 .4 G or W ir e le ss LAN 5 G >
Sche duling t ab.
Figure 69 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G > Scheduling
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 40 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G > Scheduling
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless LAN Scheduling
Enable Wireless
LAN Scheduling
Select t his t o enable Wireless LAN scheduling.
Scheduling
96
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Wireless LAN
Table 40 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G/ 5G > Scheduling ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WLAN St at us
Select On or Off t o specify whet her t he Wireless LAN is t urned on or off. This field works in
conj unct ion wit h t he D a y and Ex ce pt for t he follow in g t im e s fields.
Day
Select Eve r yda y or t he specific days t o t urn t he Wireless LAN on or off. I f you select
Eve r yda y you can not select any specific days. This field works in conj unct ion wit h t he
Ex ce pt for t he follow in g t im e s field.
For t he
following t im es
( 24- Hour
Form at )
Select a begin t im e using t he first set of h ou r and m inut e ( m in ) drop down boxes and
select an end t im e using t he second set of h ou r and m inut e ( m in ) drop down boxes. I f you
have chosen On earlier for t he WLAN St at us t he Wireless LAN will t urn on bet ween t he t wo
t im es you ent er in t hese fields. I f you have chosen Off earlier for t he WLAN St at us t he
Wireless LAN will t urn off bet ween t he t wo t im es you ent er in t hese fields.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l t o reload t he previous configurat ion for t his screen.
10.11 WDS Screen
A Wireless Dist ribut ion Syst em is a wireless connect ion bet ween t wo or m ore APs. Use t his screen
t o set t he operat ing m ode of your Rout er t o AP + Br idge or Br idge On ly and est ablish wireless
links wit h ot her APs. You need t o know t he MAC address of t he peer device, which also m ust be in
bridge m ode.
Not e: You m ust enable t he sam e wireless securit y set t ings on t he Rout er and on all
wireless client s t hat you want t o associat e wit h it .
The WDS feat ure is only available in wireless 2.4G net work.
Click N e t w or k > W ir e le ss LAN 2 .4 G > W D S t ab. The following screen opens wit h t he Ba sic
Se t t in g set t o AP+ Br idge , and Se cur it y M ode set t o W EP.
Figure 70 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G > WDS
NBG6503 User’s Guide
97
Chapter 10 Wireless LAN
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 41 Net work > Wireless LAN 2.4G > WDS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WDS Set up
Basic Set t ings
Select t he operat ing m ode for your Rout er.
•
•
AP + Br idge - The Rout er funct ions as a bridge and access point sim ult aneously.
Br idge - The Rout er act s as a wireless net work bridge and est ablishes wireless links wit h
ot her APs. You need t o know t he MAC address of t he peer device, which also m ust be in
bridge m ode. The Rout er can est ablish up t o five wireless links wit h ot her APs.
Local MAC
Address
This is t he MAC address of your Rout er.
Phy Mode
Select t he Phy m ode you want t he Rout er t o use. This dict at es t he m axim um size of packet s
during dat a t ransm ission.
Rem ot e MAC
Address
This is t he MAC address of t he peer device t hat your Rout er want s t o m ake a bridge
connect ion wit h.
You can connect t o up t o 4 peer devices.
Securit y
EncrypType
Select whet her t o use W EP, TKI P or AES encrypt ion for your WDS connect ion in t his field.
Ot herwise, select N o Se cu r it y.
98
EncrypKey
The Encryp key is used t o encrypt dat a. Peers m ust use t he sam e key for dat a t ransm ission.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes t o Rout er.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l t o reload t he previous configurat ion for t his screen.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
11
WAN
11.1 Overview
This chapt er discusses t he Rout er’s W AN screens. Use t hese screens t o configure your Rout er for
I nt ernet access.
A WAN ( Wide Area Net work) connect ion is an out side connect ion t o anot her net work or t he
I nt ernet . I t connect s your privat e net works such as a LAN ( Local Area Net work) and ot her
net works, so t hat a com put er in one locat ion can com m unicat e wit h com put ers in ot her locat ions.
Figure 71 LAN and WAN
Router
11.2 What You Can Do
• Use t he I nt e r ne t Conn e ct ion screen ( Sect ion 11.4 on page 102) t o ent er your I SP inform at ion
and set how t he com put er acquires it s I P, DNS and WAN MAC addresses.
• Use t he Adva n ce d screen ( Sect ion 11.5 on page 108) t o enable m ult icast ing, configure Windows
net working and bridge.
11.3 What You Need To Know
The inform at ion in t his sect ion can help you configure t he screens for your WAN connect ion, as well
as enable/ disable som e advanced feat ures of your Rout er.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
99
Chapter 11 WAN
11.3.1 Configuring Your Internet Connection
Encapsulation Method
Encapsulat ion is used t o include dat a from an upper layer prot ocol int o a lower layer prot ocol. To set
up a WAN connect ion t o t he I nt ernet , you need t o use t he sam e encapsulat ion m et hod used by your
I SP ( I nt ernet Service Provider) . I f your I SP offers a dial- up I nt ernet connect ion using PPPoE ( PPP
over Et hernet ) or PPTP ( Point- t o- Point Tunneling Prot ocol) , t hey should also provide a usernam e
and password ( and service nam e) for user aut hent icat ion.
WAN IP Address
The WAN I P address is an I P address for t he Rout er, which m akes it accessible from an out side
net work. I t is used by t he Rout er t o com m unicat e wit h ot her devices in ot her net works. I t can be
st at ic ( fixed) or dynam ically assigned by t he I SP each t im e t he Rout er t ries t o access t he I nt ernet .
I f your I SP assigns you a st at ic WAN I P address, t hey should also assign you t he subnet m ask and
DNS server I P address( es) ( and a gat eway I P address if you use t he Et hernet or ENET ENCAP
encapsulat ion m et hod) .
DNS Server Address Assignment
Use Dom ain Nam e Syst em ( DNS) t o m ap a dom ain nam e t o it s corresponding I P address and vice
versa, for inst ance, t he I P address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is ext rem ely
im port ant because wit hout it , you m ust know t he I P address of a com put er before you can access
it .
The Rout er can get t he DNS server addresses in t he following ways.
The I SP t ells you t he DNS server addresses, usually in t he form of an inform at ion sheet , when you
sign up. I f your I SP gives you DNS server addresses, m anually ent er t hem in t he DNS server fields.
I f your I SP dynam ically assigns t he DNS server I P addresses ( along wit h t he Rout er’s WAN I P
address) , set t he DNS server fields t o get t he DNS server address from t he I SP.
WAN MAC Address
The MAC address screen allows users t o configure t he WAN port 's MAC address by eit her using t he
fact ory default or cloning t he MAC address from a com put er on your LAN. Choose Fa ct or y D e fa ult
t o select t he fact ory assigned default MAC Address.
Ot herwise, click Clon e t he com pu t e r 's M AC a ddr e ss - I P Addr e ss and ent er t he I P address of
t he com put er on t he LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, t he
address will be copied t o configurat ion file. I t is recom m ended t hat you clone t he MAC address prior
t o hooking up t he WAN Port .
100
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 11 WAN
11.3.2 Multicast
Tradit ionally, I P packet s are t ransm it t ed in one of eit her t wo ways - Unicast ( 1 sender - 1 recipient )
or Broadcast ( 1 sender - everybody on t he net work) . Mult icast delivers I P packet s t o a group of
host s on t he net work - not everybody and not j ust 1.
Figure 72 Mult icast Exam ple
Router
I n t he m ult icast exam ple above, syst em s A and D com prise one m ult icast group. I n m ult icast ing,
t he server only needs t o send one dat a st ream and t his is delivered t o syst em s A and D.
I GMP ( I nt ernet Group Mult icast Prot ocol) is a net work- layer prot ocol used t o est ablish m em bership
in a m ult icast group - it is not used t o carry user dat a. The Rout er support s bot h I GMP version 1
( I GM P- v1 ) and I GMP version 2 ( I GM P- v2 ) .
At st art up, t he Rout er queries all direct ly connect ed net works t o gat her group m em bership. Aft er
t hat , t he Rout er periodically updat es t his inform at ion. I P m ult icast ing can be enabled/ disabled on
t he Rout er LAN and/ or WAN int erfaces in t he Web Configurat or ( LAN ; W AN ) . Select N one t o
disable I P m ult icast ing on t hese int erfaces.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
101
Chapter 11 WAN
11.4 Internet Connection
Use t his screen t o change your Rout er’s I nt ernet access set t ings. Click W AN from t he Configurat ion
m enu. The screen differs according t o t he encapsulat ion you choose.
11.4.1 Ethernet Encapsulation
This screen displays when you select Et h e r ne t encapsulat ion.
Figure 73 Net work > WAN > I nt ernet Connect ion: Et hernet Encapsulat ion
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 42 Net work > WAN > I nt ernet Connect ion: Et hernet Encapsulat ion
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I SP Param et ers for I nt ernet Access
Encapsulat ion
You m ust choose t he Et h e r n e t opt ion when t he WAN port is used as a regular Et hernet .
WAN I P Address Assignm ent
Get
aut om at ically
from I SP
( Default )
Select t his opt ion I f your I SP did not assign you a fixed I P address. This is t he default
select ion.
Use Fixed I P
Address
Select t his opt ion I f t he I SP assigned a fixed I P address.
I P Address
102
Ent er your WAN I P address in t his field if you select ed Use Fix e d I P Addr e ss.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 11 WAN
Table 42 Net work > WAN > I nt ernet Connect ion: Et hernet Encapsulat ion ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I P Subnet
Mask
Ent er t he I P Su bn e t M a sk in t his field.
Gat eway I P
Address
Ent er a Ga t e w a y I P Addr e ss ( if your I SP gave you one) in t his field.
MTU Size
Ent er t he Maxim um Transm ission Unit ( MTU) or t he largest packet size per fram e t hat your
Rout er can receive and process.
WAN DNS Assignm ent
First DNS
Server
Second DNS
Server
Select Fr om I SP if your I SP dynam ically assigns DNS server inform at ion ( and t he Rout er's
WAN I P address) . The field t o t he right displays t he ( read- only) DNS server I P address t hat
t he I SP assigns.
Select Use r - D e fin e d if you have t he I P address of a DNS server. Ent er t he DNS server's I P
address in t he field t o t he right . I f you chose Use r - D e fin e d, but leave t he I P address set t o
0.0.0.0, Use r - D e fin e d changes t o N on e aft er you click Apply. I f you set a second choice
t o Use r - D e fin e d, and ent er t he sam e I P address, t he second Use r - D e fine d changes t o
N on e aft er you click Apply.
Select N on e if you do not want t o configure DNS servers. I f you do not configure a DNS
server, you m ust know t he I P address of a com put er in order t o access it .
WAN MAC
Address
The MAC address sect ion allows users t o configure t he WAN port 's MAC address by eit her
using t he Rout er’s MAC address, copying t he MAC address from a com put er on your LAN or
m anually ent ering a MAC address.
Fact ory default
Select Fa ct or y de fa u lt t o use t he fact ory assigned default MAC Address.
Clone t he
com put er ’s
MAC address I P Address
Select Clon e t h e com pu t e r ' s M AC a ddr e ss - I P Addr e ss and ent er t he I P address of t he
com put er on t he LAN whose MAC you are cloning.
Set WAN MAC
Address
Select t his opt ion and ent er t he MAC address you want t o use.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Reset
Click Re se t t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.
11.4.2 PPPoE Encapsulation
The Rout er support s PPPoE ( Point- t o- Point Prot ocol over Et hernet ) . PPPoE is an I ETF st andard ( RFC
2516) specifying how a personal com put er ( PC) int eract s wit h a broadband m odem ( DSL, cable,
wireless, et c.) connect ion. The PPP ove r Et he r ne t opt ion is for a dial- up connect ion using PPPoE.
For t he service provider, PPPoE offers an access and aut hent icat ion m et hod t hat works wit h exist ing
access cont rol syst em s ( for exam ple Radius) .
One of t he benefit s of PPPoE is t he abilit y t o let you access one of m ult iple net work services, a
funct ion known as dynam ic service select ion. This enables t he service provider t o easily creat e and
offer new I P services for individuals.
Operat ionally, PPPoE saves significant effort for bot h you and t he I SP or carrier, as it requires no
specific configurat ion of t he broadband m odem at t he cust om er sit e.
By im plem ent ing PPPoE direct ly on t he Rout er ( rat her t han individual com put ers) , t he com put ers on
t he LAN do not need PPPoE soft ware inst alled, since t he Rout er does t hat part of t he t ask.
Furt herm ore, wit h NAT, all of t he LANs’ com put ers will have access.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
103
Chapter 11 WAN
This screen displays when you select PPPoE encapsulat ion.
Figure 74 Net work > WAN > I nt ernet Connect ion: PPPoE Encapsulat ion
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 43 Net work > WAN > I nt ernet Connect ion: PPPoE Encapsulat ion
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I SP Param et ers for I nt ernet Access
Encapsulat ion
Select PPP ove r Et h e r n e t if you connect t o your I nt ernet via dial- up.
User Nam e
Type t he user nam e given t o you by your I SP.
Password
Type t he password associat ed wit h t he user nam e above.
Ret ype t o
Confirm
Type your password again t o m ake sure t hat you have ent ered is correct ly.
MTU Size
Ent er t he Maxim um Transm ission Unit ( MTU) or t he largest packet size per fram e t hat your
Rout er can receive and process.
Nailed- Up
Connect ion
Select N a ile d- Up Con n e ct ion if you do not want t he connect ion t o t im e out .
I dle Tim eout
( sec)
This value specifies t he t im e in m inut es t hat elapses before t he rout er aut om at ically
disconnect s from t he PPPoE server.
WAN I P Address Assignm ent
104
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 11 WAN
Table 43 Net work > WAN > I nt ernet Connect ion: PPPoE Encapsulat ion ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Get aut om at ically
from I SP
Select t his opt ion I f your I SP did not assign you a fixed I P address. This is t he default
select ion.
Use Fixed I P
Address
Select t his opt ion I f t he I SP assigned a fixed I P address.
My WAN I P
Address
Ent er your WAN I P address in t his field if you select ed Use Fix e d I P Addr e ss.
WAN DNS Assignm ent
First DNS Server
Second DNS
Server
Select Fr om I SP if your I SP dynam ically assigns DNS server inform at ion ( and t he
Rout er's WAN I P address) . The field t o t he right displays t he ( read- only) DNS server I P
address t hat t he I SP assigns.
Select Use r - D e fin e d if you have t he I P address of a DNS server. Ent er t he DNS server's
I P address in t he field t o t he right . I f you chose Use r - D e fin e d, but leave t he I P address
set t o 0.0.0.0, Use r - D e fin e d changes t o N on e aft er you click Apply. I f you set a second
choice t o Use r - D e fin e d, and ent er t he sam e I P address, t he second Use r - D e fin e d
changes t o N on e aft er you click Apply.
Select N on e if you do not want t o configure DNS servers. I f you do not configure a DNS
server, you m ust know t he I P address of a com put er in order t o access it .
WAN MAC
Address
The MAC address sect ion allow s users t o configure t he WAN port 's MAC address by using
t he Rout er’s MAC address, copying t he MAC address from a com put er on your LAN or
m anually ent ering a MAC address.
Fact ory default
Select Fa ct or y de fa u lt t o use t he fact ory assigned default MAC Address.
Clone t he
com put er ’s MAC
address - I P
Address
Select Clon e t h e com pu t e r 's M AC a ddr e ss - I P Addr e ss and ent er t he I P address of
t he com put er on t he LAN whose MAC you are cloning.
Set WAN MAC
Address
Select t his opt ion and ent er t he MAC address you want t o use.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Reset
Click Re se t t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.
11.4.3 PPTP Encapsulation
Point- t o- Point Tunneling Prot ocol ( PPTP) is a net work prot ocol t hat enables secure t ransfer of dat a
from a rem ot e client t o a privat e server, creat ing a Virt ual Privat e Net work ( VPN) using TCP/ I Pbased net works.
PPTP support s on- dem and, m ult i- prot ocol and virt ual privat e net working over public net works, such
as t he I nt ernet .
NBG6503 User’s Guide
105
Chapter 11 WAN
This screen displays when you select PPTP encapsulat ion.
Figure 75 Net work > WAN > I nt ernet Connect ion: PPTP Encapsulat ion
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 44 Net work > WAN > I nt ernet Connect ion: PPTP Encapsulat ion
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I SP Param et ers for I nt ernet Access
106
Connect ion
Type
To configure a PPTP client , you m ust configure t he Use r N a m e and Pa ssw or d fields for a
PPP connect ion and t he PPTP param et ers for a PPTP connect ion.
User Nam e
Type t he user nam e given t o you by your I SP.
Password
Type t he password associat ed wit h t he User Nam e above.
Ret ype t o
Confirm
Type your password again t o m ake sure t hat you have ent ered is correct ly.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 11 WAN
Table 44 Net work > WAN > I nt ernet Connect ion: PPTP Encapsulat ion ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Nailed- up
Connect ion
Select N a ile d- Up Con n e ct ion if you do not want t he connect ion t o t im e out .
I dle Tim eout
This value specifies t he t im e in m inut es t hat elapses before t he Rout er aut om at ically
disconnect s from t he PPTP server.
PPTP Configurat ion
Server I P
Address
Type t he I P address of t he PPTP server.
Get
aut om at ically
from I SP
Select t his opt ion I f your I SP did not assign you a fixed I P address. This is t he default
select ion.
Use Fixed I P
Address
Select t his opt ion I f t he I SP assigned a fixed I P address.
I P Address
Ent er your WAN I P address in t his field if you select ed Use Fix e d I P Addr e ss.
I P Subnet
Mask
Your Rout er will aut om at ically calculat e t he subnet m ask based on t he I P address t hat you
assign. Unless you are im plem ent ing subnet t ing, use t he subnet m ask com put ed by t he
Rout er.
Gat eway I P
Address
Ent er a Ga t e w a y I P Addr e ss ( if your I SP gave you one) in t his field.
WAN I P Address Assignm ent
Get
aut om at ically
from I SP
Select t his t o get your WAN I P address from your I SP.
Use Fixed I P
Address
Select t his opt ion I f t he I SP assigned a fixed I P address.
My WAN I P
Address
Ent er your WAN I P address in t his field if you select ed Use Fix e d I P Addr e ss.
WAN DNS Assignm ent
First DNS
Server
Second DNS
Server
Select Fr om I SP if your I SP dynam ically assigns DNS server inform at ion ( and t he Rout er's
WAN I P address) . The field t o t he right displays t he ( read- only) DNS server I P address t hat
t he I SP assigns.
Select Use r - D e fin e d if you have t he I P address of a DNS server. Ent er t he DNS server's I P
address in t he field t o t he right . I f you chose Use r - D e fine d, but leave t he I P address set t o
0.0.0.0, Use r - D e fin e d changes t o N on e aft er you click Apply. I f you set a second choice
t o Use r - D e fine d, and ent er t he sam e I P address, t he second Use r - D e fin e d changes t o
N on e aft er you click Apply.
Select N on e if you do not want t o configure DNS servers. I f you do not configure a DNS
server, you m ust know t he I P address of a com put er in order t o access it .
WAN MAC
Address
The MAC address sect ion allows users t o configure t he WAN port 's MAC address by eit her
using t he Rout er’s MAC address, copying t he MAC address from a com put er on your LAN or
m anually ent ering a MAC address.
Fact ory default
Select Fa ct or y de fa ult t o use t he fact ory assigned default MAC Address.
Clone t he
com put er ’s
MAC address I P Address
Select Clon e t he com pu t e r 's M AC a ddr e ss - I P Addr e ss and ent er t he I P address of t he
com put er on t he LAN whose MAC you are cloning.
Set WAN MAC
Address
Select t his opt ion and ent er t he MAC address you want t o use.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Reset
Click Re se t t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
107
Chapter 11 WAN
11.5 Advanced WAN Screen
Use t his screen t o enable M ult ica st and enable Aut o- br idge .
Not e: The cat egor ies show n in t his screen are independent of each ot her.
To change your Rout er’s advanced WAN set t ings, click N e t w or k > W AN > Adva nce d. The screen
appears as shown.
Figure 76 Net work > WAN > Advanced
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 45 Net work > WAN > Advanced
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Mult icast Set up
Mult icast
Select I GM Pv1 / v2 t o enable m ult icast ing. This applies t o t raffic rout ed from t he WAN t o
t he LAN.
Select N on e t o disable t his feat ure. This m ay cause incom ing t raffic t o be dropped or sent
t o all connect ed net work devices.
Aut o- Subnet Set up
None
Select t his opt ion t o have t he Rout er do not hing when it get s a WAN I P address in t he range
of 192.168.x.y ( where x and y are from zero t o nine) or in t he sam e subnet as t he LAN I P
address.
Enable Aut obridge m ode
Select t his opt ion t o have t he Rout er swit ch t o bridge m ode aut om at ically when t he Rout er
get s a WAN I P address in t he range of 192.168.x.y ( where x and y are from zero t o nine) no
m at t er what t he LAN I P address is.
Enable Aut o- I PChange m ode
Select t his opt ion t o have t he Rout er change it s LAN I P address t o 10.0.0.1 or 192.168.1.1
accordingly when t he Rout er get s a dynam ic WAN I P address in t he sam e subnet as t he LAN
I P address 192.168.1.1 or 10.0.0.1.
The NAT, DHCP server and firewall funct ions on t he Rout er are st ill available in t hism ode.
108
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Reset
Click Re se t t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
12
LAN
12.1 Overview
This chapt er describes how t o configure LAN set t ings.
A Local Area Net work ( LAN) is a shared com m unicat ion syst em t o which m any com put ers are
at t ached. A LAN is a com put er net work lim it ed t o t he im m ediat e area, usually t he sam e building or
floor of a building. The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server, m anage I P
addresses, and part it ion your physical net work int o logical net works.
Figure 77 LAN Exam ple
The LAN screens can help you m anage I P addresses.
12.2 What You Can Do
• Use t he I P screen ( Sect ion 12.4 on page 111) t o change t he I P address for your Rout er.
• Use t he I P Alia s screen ( Sect ion 12.5 on page 111) t o have t he Rout er apply I P alias t o creat e
LAN subnet s.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
109
Chapter 12 LAN
12.3 What You Need To Know
The act ual physical connect ion det erm ines whet her t he Rout er port s are LAN or WAN port s. There
are t wo separat e I P net works, one inside t he LAN net work and t he ot her out side t he WAN net work
as shown next .
Figure 78 LAN and WAN I P Addresses
The LAN param et ers of t he Rout er are preset in t he fact ory wit h t he following values:
• I P address of 192.168.1.1 wit h subnet m ask of 255.255.255.0 ( 24 bit s)
• DHCP server enabled wit h 32 client I P addresses st art ing from 192.168.1.33.
These param et ers should work for t he m aj orit y of inst allat ions. I f your I SP gives you explicit DNS
server address( es) , read t he em bedded Web Configurat or help regarding what fields need t o be
configured.
12.3.1 IP Pool Setup
The Rout er is pre- configured wit h a pool of 32 I P addresses st art ing from 192.168.1.33 t o
192.168.1.64. This configurat ion leaves 31 I P addresses ( excluding t he Rout er it self ) in t he lower
range ( 192.168.1.2 t o 192.168.1.32) for ot her server com put ers, for inst ance, servers for m ail,
FTP, TFTP, web, et c., t hat you m ay have.
12.3.2 LAN TCP/IP
The Rout er has built- in DHCP server capabilit y t hat assigns I P addresses and DNS servers t o
syst em s t hat support DHCP client capabilit y.
12.3.3 IP Alias
I P alias allows you t o part it ion a physical net work int o different logical net works over t he sam e
Et hernet int erface. The Rout er support s t hree logical LAN int erfaces via it s single physical Et hernet
int erface wit h t he Rout er it self as t he gat eway for each LAN net work.
110
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 12 LAN
12.4 LAN IP Screen
Use t his screen t o change t he I P address for your Rout er. Click N e t w or k > LAN > I P.
Figure 79 Net work > LAN > I P
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 46 Net work > LAN > I P
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I P Address
Type t he I P address of your Rout er in dot t ed decim al not at ion.
I P Subnet Mask
The subnet m ask specifies t he net work num ber port ion of an I P address. Your Rout er will
aut om at ically calculat e t he subnet m ask based on t he I P address t hat you assign. Unless
you are im plem ent ing subnet t ing, use t he subnet m ask com put ed by t he Rout er.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Reset
Click Re se t t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.
12.5 IP Alias Screen
Use t his screen t o have t he Rout er apply I P alias t o creat e LAN subnet s. Click LAN > I P Alia s.
Figure 80 Net work > LAN > I P Alias
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 47 Net work > LAN > I P Alias
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I P Alias
Check t his t o enable I P alias.
I P Address
Type t he I P alias address of your Rout er in dot t ed decim al not at ion.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
111
Chapter 12 LAN
Table 47 Net work > LAN > I P Alias ( cont inued)
112
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I P Subnet Mask
The subnet m ask specifies t he net work num ber port ion of an I P address. Your Rout er will
aut om at ically calculat e t he subnet m ask based on t he I P address t hat you assign. Unless
you are im plem ent ing subnet t ing, use t he subnet m ask com put ed by t he Rout er.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Reset
Click Re se t t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
13
DHCP Server
13.1 Overview
DHCP ( Dynam ic Host Configurat ion Prot ocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual client s t o
obt ain TCP/ I P configurat ion at st art - up from a server. You can configure t he Rout er’s LAN as a DHCP
server or disable it . When configured as a server, t he Rout er provides t he TCP/ I P configurat ion for
t he client s. I f DHCP service is disabled, you m ust have anot her DHCP server on your LAN, or else
t he com put er m ust be m anually configured.
13.2 What You Can Do
• Use t he Ge n e r a l ( Sect ion 13.3 on page 113) screen t o enable t he DHCP server.
• Use t he Adva nce d ( Sect ion 13.4 on page 114) screen t o assign I P addresses on t he LAN t o
specific individual com put ers based on t heir MAC Addresses.
13.3 General Screen
Use t his screen t o enable t he DHCP server. Click N e t w or k > D H CP Se r ve r. The following screen
displays.
Figure 81 Net work > DHCP Server > General
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 48 Net work > DHCP Server > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable DHCP
Server
Enable or Disable DHCP for LAN.
I P Pool St art ing
Address
This field specifies t he first of t he cont iguous addresses in t he I P address pool for LAN.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
113
Chapter 13 DHCP Server
Table 48 Net work > DHCP Server > General ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Pool Size
This field specifies t he size, or count of t he I P address pool for LAN.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Reset
Click Re se t t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.
13.4 Advanced Screen
This screen allows you t o assign I P addresses on t he LAN t o specific individual com put ers based on
t heir MAC addresses. You can also use t his screen t o configure t he DNS server inform at ion t hat t he
Rout er sends t o t he DHCP client s.
To change your Rout er’s st at ic DHCP set t ings, click N e t w or k > D H CP Se r ve r > Adva nce d. The
following screen displays.
Figure 82 Net work > DHCP Server > Advanced
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 49 Net work > DHCP Server > Advanced
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
LAN St at ic DHCP Table
114
This is t he index num ber of t he st at ic I P t able ent ry ( row) .
MAC Address
Type t he MAC address ( wit h colons) of a com put er on your LAN.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 13 DHCP Server
Table 49 Net work > DHCP Server > Advanced ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I P Address
Type t he LAN I P address of a com put er on your LAN.
DNS Server
DNS Servers
Assigned by
DHCP Server
The Rout er passes a DNS ( Dom ain Nam e Syst em ) server I P address ( in t he order you
specify here) t o t he DHCP client s. The Rout er only passes t his inform at ion t o t he LAN DHCP
client s when you select t he Ena ble D H CP Se r ve r check box. When you clear t he En a ble
D H CP Se r ve r check box, DHCP service is disabled and you m ust have anot her DHCP sever
on your LAN, or else t he com put ers m ust have t heir DNS server addresses m anually
configured.
First DNS
Server
Select Fr om I SP if your I SP dynam ically assigns DNS server inform at ion ( and t he Rout er's
WAN I P address) . The field t o t he right displays t he ( read- only) DNS server I P address t hat
t he I SP assigns.
Second DNS
Server
Select Use r - D e fin e d if you have t he I P address of a DNS server. Ent er t he DNS server's I P
address in t he field t o t he right . I f you chose Use r - D e fin e d, but leave t he I P address set t o
0.0.0.0, Use r - D e fin e d changes t o N on e aft er you click Apply. I f you set a second choice t o
Use r - D e fine d, and ent er t he sam e I P address, t he second Use r - D e fine d changes t o N on e
aft er you click Apply.
Select D N S Re la y t o have t he Rout er act as a DNS proxy. The Rout er's LAN I P address
displays in t he field t o t he right ( read- only) . The Rout er t ells t he DHCP client s on t he LAN
t hat t he Rout er it self is t he DNS server. When a com put er on t he LAN sends a DNS query t o
t he Rout er, t he Rout er forwards t he query t o t he Rout er's syst em DNS server ( configured in
t he W AN > I n t e r n e t Con n e ct ion screen) and relays t he response back t o t he com put er.
You can only select D N S Re la y for one of t he t hree servers; if you select D N S Re la y for a
second or t hird DNS server, t hat choice changes t o N on e aft er you click Apply.
Select N on e if you do not want t o configure DNS servers. I f you do not configure a DNS
server, you m ust know t he I P address of a com put er in order t o access it .
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Reset
Click Re se t t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
115
C HAPTER
14
Network Address Translation (NAT)
14.1 Overview
NAT ( Net work Address Translat ion - NAT, RFC 1631) is t he t ranslat ion of t he I P address of a host in
a packet . For exam ple, t he source address of an out going packet , used wit hin one net work is
changed t o a different I P address known wit hin anot her net work.
Each packet has t wo addresses – a source address and a dest inat ion address. For out going packet s,
NAT m aps privat e ( local) I P addresses t o globally unique ones required for com m unicat ion wit h
host s on ot her net works. I t replaces t he original I P source address in each packet and t hen
forwards it t o t he I nt ernet . The Rout er keeps t rack of t he original addresses and port num bers so
incom ing reply packet s can have t heir original values rest ored. The following figure illust rat es t his.
Figure 83 NAT Exam ple
For m ore inform at ion on I P address t ranslat ion, refer t o RFC 1631, The I P Net work Address
Translat or ( NAT) .
14.2 What You Can Do
• Use t he Ge n e r a l screen ( Sect ion 14.3 on page 118) t o enable NAT and set a default server.
• Use t he Applica t ion screen ( Sect ion 14.4 on page 118) o forward incom ing service request s t o
t he server( s) on your local net work.
• Use t he Adva nce d screen ( Sect ion 14.5 on page 120) t o change your Rout er’s t rigger port
set t ings.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
117
Chapter 14 Network Address Translation (NAT)
14.3 General NAT Screen
Use t his screen t o enable NAT and set a default server. Click N e t w or k > N AT > Ge n e r a l t o open
t he following screen.
Figure 84 Net work > NAT > General
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 50 Net work > NAT > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
NAT Set up
Enable Net work
Address
Translat ion
Net work Address Translat ion ( NAT) allows t he t ranslat ion of an I nt ernet prot ocol address
used wit hin one net work ( for exam ple a privat e I P address used in a local net work) t o a
different I P address known wit hin anot her net work ( for exam ple a public I P address used on
t he I nt ernet ) .
Select t he check box t o enable NAT.
Default Server Set up
Server I P
Address
I n addit ion t o t he servers for specified services, NAT support s a default server. A default
server receives packet s from port s t hat are not specified in t he Applica t ion screen.
I f you do not assign a D e fa u lt Se r ve r I P a ddr e ss, t he Rout er discards all packet s received
for port s t hat are not specified in t he Applica t ion screen or rem ot e m anagem ent .
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Reset
Click Re se t t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.
14.4 NAT Application Screen
Use t he Applica t ion screen t o forward incom ing service request s t o t he server( s) on your local
net work. You m ay ent er a single port num ber or a range of port num bers t o be forwarded, and t he
local I P address of t he desired server. The port num ber ident ifies a service; for exam ple, web
service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. I n som e cases, such as for unknown services or where one
server can support m ore t han one service ( for exam ple bot h FTP and web service) , it m ight be
bet t er t o specify a range of port num bers.
I n addit ion t o t he servers for specified services, NAT support s a default server. A service request
t hat does not have a server explicit ly designat ed for it is forwarded t o t he default server. I f t he
default is not defined, t he service request is sim ply discarded.
118
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Not e: Many resident ial broadband I SP account s do not allow you t o run any server
processes ( such as a Web or FTP server) from your locat ion. Your I SP m ay
periodically check for servers and m ay suspend your account if it discovers any
act ive services at your locat ion. I f you are unsure, refer t o your I SP.
Port forwarding allows you t o define t he local servers t o which t he incom ing services will be
forwarded. To change your Rout er’s port forwarding set t ings, click N e t w or k > N AT > Applica t ion .
The screen appears as shown.
Not e: I f you do not assign a D e fa u lt Se r ve r I P a ddr e ss in t he N AT > Ge n e r a l screen,
t he Rout er discards all packet s received for port s t hat are not specified in t his
screen or rem ot e m anagem ent .
Refer t o Appendix D on page 223 for port num bers com m only used for part icular services.
Figure 85 Net work > NAT > Applicat ion
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 51 Net work > NAT > Applicat ion
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add Applicat ion Rule
Act ive
Select t he check box t o enable t his rule and t he request ed service can be forwarded t o t he
host wit h a specified int ernal I P address.
Clear t he checkbox t o disallow forwarding of t hese port s t o an inside server wit hout having
t o delet e t he ent ry.
Service Nam e
Type a nam e ( of up t o 31 print able charact ers) t o ident ify t his rule in t he first field next t o
Se r vice N a m e . Ot herwise, select a predefined service in t he second field next t o Se r vice
N a m e . The predefined service nam e and port num ber( s) will display in t he Se r vice N a m e
and Por t fields.
Port
Type a port num ber( s) t o define t he service t o be forwarded t o t he specified server.
To specify a range of port s, ent er a hyphen ( - ) bet ween t he first port and t he last port , such
as 10- 20.
To specify t wo or m ore non- consecut ive port num bers, separat e t hem by a com m a wit hout
spaces, such as 123,567.
Server I P
Address
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Type t he I P address of t he server on your LAN t hat receives packet s from t he port ( s)
specified in t he Por t field.
119
Chapter 14 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Table 51 Net work > NAT > Applicat ion ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Applicat ion Rules Sum m ary
This is t he num ber of an individual port forwarding server ent ry.
Act ive
This icon is t urned on when t he rule is enabled.
Nam e
This field displays a nam e t o ident ify t his rule.
Port
This field displays t he port num ber( s) .
Server I P
Address
This field displays t he inside I P address of t he server.
Modify
Click t he Edit icon t o display and m odify an exist ing rule set t ing in t he fields under Add
Applica t ion Ru le .
Click t he Re m ove icon t o delet e a rule.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Reset
Click Re se t t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.
14.5 NAT Advanced Screen
Som e services use a dedicat ed range of port s on t he client side and a dedicat ed range of port s on
t he server side. Wit h regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT t o forward a service
( com ing in from t he server on t he WAN) t o t he I P address of a com put er on t he client side ( LAN) .
The problem is t hat port forwarding only forwards a service t o a single LAN I P address. I n order t o
use t he sam e service on a different LAN com put er, you have t o m anually replace t he LAN
com put er's I P address in t he forwarding port wit h anot her LAN com put er's I P address.
Trigger port forwarding solves t his problem by allowing com put ers on t he LAN t o dynam ically t ake
t urns using t he service. The Rout er records t he I P address of a LAN com put er t hat sends t raffic t o
t he WAN t o request a service wit h a specific port num ber and prot ocol ( a " t rigger" port ) . When t he
Rout er's WAN port receives a response wit h a specific port num ber and prot ocol ( " incom ing" port ) ,
t he Rout er forwards t he t raffic t o t he LAN I P address of t he com put er t hat sent t he request . Aft er
t hat com put er ’s connect ion for t hat service closes, anot her com put er on t he LAN can use t he
service in t he sam e m anner. This way you do not need t o configure a new I P address each t im e you
want a different LAN com put er t o use t he applicat ion.
To change your Rout er’s t rigger port set t ings, click N e t w or k > N AT > Adva nce d. The screen
appears as shown.
120
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Not e: Only one LAN com put er can use a t rigger port ( range) at a t im e.
Figure 86 Net work > NAT > Advanced
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 52 Net work > NAT > Advanced
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is t he rule index num ber ( read- only) .
Nam e
Type a unique nam e ( up t o 15 charact ers) for ident ificat ion purposes. All charact ers are
perm it t ed - including spaces.
I ncom ing
I ncom ing is a port ( or a range of port s) t hat a server on t he WAN uses when it sends out a
part icular service. The Rout er forwards t he t raffic wit h t his port ( or range of port s) t o t he
client com put er on t he LAN t hat request ed t he service.
St art Port
Type a port num ber or t he st art ing port num ber in a range of port num bers.
End Port
Type a port num ber or t he ending port num ber in a range of port num bers.
Trigger
The t rigger port is a port ( or a range of port s) t hat causes ( or t riggers) t he Rout er t o record
t he I P address of t he LAN com put er t hat sent t he t raffic t o a server on t he WAN.
St art Port
Type a port num ber or t he st art ing port num ber in a range of port num bers.
End Port
Type a port num ber or t he ending port num ber in a range of port num bers.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Reset
Click Re se t t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
121
Chapter 14 Network Address Translation (NAT)
14.5.1 Trigger Port Forwarding Example
The following is an exam ple of t rigger port forwarding.
Figure 87 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Exam ple
Router
Router
Jane request s a file from t he Real Audio server ( port 7070) .
Port 7070 is a “ t rigger ” port and causes t he Rout er t o record Jane’s com put er I P address. The
Rout er associat es Jane's com put er I P address wit h t he " incom ing" port range of 6970- 7170.
The Real Audio server responds using a port num ber ranging bet ween 6970- 7170.
The Rout er forwards t he t raffic t o Jane’s com put er I P address.
Only Jane can connect t o t he Real Audio server unt il t he connect ion is closed or t im es out . The
Rout er t im es out in t hree m inut es wit h UDP ( User Dat agram Prot ocol) , or t wo hours wit h TCP/ I P
( Transfer Cont rol Prot ocol/ I nt ernet Prot ocol) .
14.5.2 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports
122
Trigger event s only happen on dat a t hat is going com ing from inside t he Rout er and going t o t he
out side.
I f an applicat ion needs a cont inuous dat a st ream , t hat port ( range) will be t ied up so t hat anot her
com put er on t he LAN can’t t rigger it .
NBG6503 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
15
Dynamic DNS
15.1 Overview
Dynam ic DNS ( DDNS) services let you use a dom ain nam e wit h a dynam ic I P address.
15.2 What You Can Do
Use t he D yn a m ic D N S screen ( Sect ion 15.4 on page 123) t o enable DDNS and configure t he DDNS
set t ings on t he Rout er.
15.3 What You Need To Know
Dynam ic DNS allows you t o updat e your current dynam ic I P address wit h one or m any dynam ic
DNS services so t hat anyone can cont act you ( in Net Meet ing, CU- SeeMe, et c.) . You can also access
your FTP server or Web sit e on your own com put er using a dom ain nam e ( for inst ance
m yhost .dhs.org, where m yhost is a nam e of your choice) t hat will never change inst ead of using an
I P address t hat changes each t im e you reconnect . Your friends or relat ives will always be able t o
call you even if t hey don't know your I P address.
15.4 Dynamic DNS Screen
To change your Rout er’s DDNS, click N e t w or k > D D N S. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 88 Net work > DDNS
NBG6503 User’s Guide
123
Chapter 15 Dynamic DNS
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 53 Net work > DDNS
124
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable
Dynam ic DNS
Select t his check box t o use dynam ic DNS.
Service
Provider
Select t he nam e of your Dynam ic DNS service provider.
Host Nam e
Ent er a host nam es in t he field provided. You can specify up t o t wo host nam es in t he field
separat ed by a com m a ( " ," ) .
User Nam e
Ent er your user nam e.
Password
Ent er t he password assigned t o you.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Reset
Click Re se t t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
16
Static Route
16.1 Overview
This chapt er shows you how t o configure st at ic rout es for your Rout er.
Each rem ot e node specifies only t he net work t o which t he gat eway is direct ly connect ed, and t he
Rout er has no knowledge of t he net works beyond. For inst ance, t he Rout er knows about net work
N2 in t he following figure t hrough rem ot e node Rout er 1. However, t he Rout er is unable t o rout e a
packet t o net work N3 because it doesn't know t hat t here is a rout e t hrough t he sam e rem ot e node
Rout er 1 ( via gat eway Rout er 2) . The st at ic rout es are for you t o t ell t he Rout er about t he net works
beyond t he rem ot e nodes.
Figure 89 Exam ple of St at ic Rout ing Topology
16.2 What You Can Do
Use t he I P St a t ic Rout e screen ( Sect ion 16.3 on page 126) t o view, add and delet e rout es.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
125
Chapter 16 Static Route
16.3 IP Static Route Screen
Click N e t w or k > St a t ic Rou t e t o open t he I P St a t ic Rout e screen.
Figure 90 Net work > St at ic Rout e
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 54 Net work > St at ic Rout e
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
St at ic Rout ing Set t ings
Rout e Nam e
Ent er a t he nam e t hat describes or ident ifies t his rout e.
Dest inat ion I P
Address
Ent er t he I P net work address of t he final dest inat ion.
I P Subnet
Net m ask
This is t he subnet t o which t he rout e’s final dest inat ion belongs.
Gat eway I P
Address
Ent er t he t he I P address of t he gat eway.
Met ric
Assign a num ber t o ident ify t he rout e.
Add Rule
Click t his t o add t he I P st at ic rout e.
Applicat ion Rules Sum m ary
126
No.
This is t he num ber of an individual st at ic rout e.
Act ive
The rules are always on and t his is indicat ed by t he icon.
Nam e
This is t he nam e t hat describes or ident ifies t his rout e.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 16 Static Route
Table 54 Net work > St at ic Rout e
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Dest inat ion
This param et er specifies t he I P net work address of t he final dest inat ion. Rout ing is
always based on net work num ber.
Gat eway
This is t he I P address of t he gat eway. The gat eway is a rout er or swit ch on t he
sam e net work segm ent as t he device's LAN or WAN port . The gat eway helps
forward packet s t o t heir dest inat ions.
Met ric
This is t he num ber assigned t o t he rout e.
Delet e
Click t he Delet e icon t o rem ove a st at ic rout e from t he Rout er. A window displays
asking you t o confirm t hat you want t o delet e t he rout e.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
127
C HAPTER
17
Firewall
17.1 Overview
This chapt er shows you how t o enable and configure t he firewall t hat prot ect s your Rout er and your
LAN from unwant ed or m alicious t raffic.
Enable t he firewall t o prot ect your LAN com put ers from at t acks by hackers on t he I nt ernet and
cont rol access bet ween t he LAN and WAN. By default t he firewall:
• allows t raffic t hat originat es from your LAN com put ers t o go t o all of t he net works.
• blocks t raffic t hat originat es on t he ot her net works from going t o t he LAN.
The following figure illust rat es t he default firewall act ion. User A can init iat e an I M ( I nst ant
Messaging) session from t he LAN t o t he WAN ( 1) . Ret urn t raffic for t his session is also allowed ( 2) .
However ot her t raffic init iat ed from t he WAN is blocked ( 3 and 4) .
Figure 91 Default Firewall Act ion
17.2 What You Can Do
• Use t he Ge n e r a l ( Sect ion 17.4 on page 130) screen t o enable or disable t he Rout er’s firewall.
• Use t he Se r vice s screen ( Sect ion 17.5 on page 131) screen enable service blocking, ent er/
delet e/ m odify t he services you want t o block and t he dat e/ t im e you want t o block t hem .
NBG6503 User’s Guide
129
Chapter 17 Firewall
17.3 What You Need To Know
The Rout er’s firewall feat ure physically separat es t he LAN and t he WAN and act s as a secure
gat eway for all dat a passing bet ween t he net works.
I t is designed t o prot ect against Denial of Service ( DoS) at t acks when act ivat ed ( click t he Ge n e r a l
t ab under Fir e w a ll and t hen click t he Ena ble Fir e w a ll check box) . The Rout er's purpose is t o
allow a privat e Local Area Net work ( LAN) t o be securely connect ed t o t he I nt ernet . The Rout er can
be used t o prevent t heft , dest ruct ion and m odificat ion of dat a, as well as log event s, which m ay be
im port ant t o t he securit y of your net work.
The Rout er is inst alled bet ween t he LAN and a broadband m odem connect ing t o t he I nt ernet . This
allows it t o act as a secure gat eway for all dat a passing bet ween t he I nt ernet and t he LAN.
The Rout er has one Et hernet WAN port and four Et hernet LAN port s, which are used t o physically
separat e t he net work int o t wo areas.The WAN ( Wide Area Net work) port at t aches t o t he broadband
( cable or DSL) m odem t o t he I nt ernet .
The LAN ( Local Area Net work) port at t aches t o a net work of com put ers, which needs securit y from
t he out side world. These com put ers will have access t o I nt ernet services such as e- m ail, FTP and
t he World Wide Web. However, "inbound access" is not allowed ( by default ) unless t he rem ot e host
is aut horized t o use a specific service.
17.4 General Firewall Screen
Use t his screen t o enable or disable t he Rout er’s firewall, and set up firewall logs. Click Se cu r it y >
Fir e w a ll t o open t he Ge ne r a l screen.
Figure 92 Securit y > Firewall > General
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 55 Securit y > Firewall > General
130
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable Firewall
Select t his check box t o act ivat e t he firewall. The Rout er perform s access cont rol and
prot ect s against Denial of Service ( DoS) at t acks when t he firewall is act ivat ed.
Apply
Click Apply t o save t he set t ings.
Reset
Click Re se t t o st art configuring t his screen again.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Firewall
17.5 Services Screen
I f an out side user at t em pt s t o probe an unsupport ed port on your Rout er, an I CMP response packet
is aut om at ically ret urned. This allows t he out side user t o know t he Rout er exist s. Use t his screen t o
prevent t he I CMP response packet from being sent . This keeps out siders from discovering your
Rout er when unsupport ed port s are probed.
You can also use t his screen t o enable service blocking, ent er/ delet e/ m odify t he services you want
t o block and t he dat e/ t im e you want t o block t hem .
Click Se cur it y > Fir e w a ll > Se r vice s. The screen appears as shown next .
Figure 93 Securit y > Firewall > Services
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 56 Securit y > Firewall > Services
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I CMP
I nt ernet Cont rol Message Prot ocol is a m essage cont rol and error- report ing prot ocol
bet ween a host server and a gat eway t o t he I nt ernet . I CMP uses I nt ernet Prot ocol ( I P)
dat agram s, but t he m essages are processed by t he TCP/ I P soft ware and direct ly apparent
t o t he applicat ion user.
Respond t o
Ping on
The Rout er will not respond t o any incom ing Ping request s when D isa ble is select ed. Select
LAN t o reply t o incom ing LAN Ping request s. Select W AN t o reply t o incom ing WAN Ping
request s. Ot herwise select LAN & W AN t o reply t o all incom ing LAN and WAN Ping
request s.
Apply
Click Apply t o save t he set t ings.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
131
Chapter 17 Firewall
Table 56 Securit y > Firewall > Services ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable Firewall Rule
Enable Firewall
Rule
Select t his check box t o act ivat e t he firewall rules t hat you define ( see Add Fir e w a ll Rule
below)
Apply
Click Apply t o save t he set t ings.
Add Firewall Rule
Service Nam e
Ent er a nam e t hat ident ifies or describes t he firewall rule.
MAC Address
Ent er t he MAC address of t he com put er for which t he firewall rule applies.
Dest I P Address
Ent er t he I P address of t he com put er t o which t raffic for t he applicat ion or service is
ent ering.
The Rout er applies t he firewall rule t o t raffic init iat ing from t his com put er.
Source I P
Address
Ent er t he I P address of t he com put er t hat init ializes t raffic for t he applicat ion or service.
Prot ocol
Select t he prot ocol ( TCP, UD P, I CM P or N on e ) used t o t ransport t he packet s for which you
want t o apply t he firewall rule.
Dest Port
Range
Ent er t he port num ber/ range of t he dest inat ion t hat define t he t raffic t ype, for exam ple TCP
port 80 defines web t raffic.
Source Port
Range
Ent er t he port num ber/ range of t he source t hat define t he t raffic t ype, for exam ple TCP port
80 defines web t raffic.
Add Rule
Click Add t o save t he firewall rule.
The Rout er applies t he firewall rule t o t raffic init iat ing from t his com put er.
Firewall Rule
This is your firewall rule num ber. The ordering of your rules is im port ant as rules are applied
in t urn.
Service Nam e
This is a nam e t hat ident ifies or describes t he firewall rule.
MAC Address
This is t he MAC address of t he com put er for which t he firewall rule applies.
Dest I P Address
This is t he I P address of t he com put er t o which t raffic for t he applicat ion or service is
ent ering.
Source I P
Address
This is t he I P address of t he com put er from which t raffic for t he applicat ion or service is
init ialized.
Prot ocol
This is t he prot ocol ( TCP, UD P, I CM P or N on e ) used t o t ransport t he packet s for which you
want t o apply t he firewall rule.
Dest Port
Range
This is t he port num ber/ range of t he dest inat ion t hat define t he t raffic t ype, for exam ple
TCP port 80 defines web t raffic.
Source Port
Range
This is t he port num ber/ range of t he source t hat define t he t raffic t ype, for exam ple TCP
port 80 defines web t raffic.
Act ion
D r op - Traffic m at ching t he condit ions of t he firewall rule are st opped.
Delet e
Click t his t o rem ove t he firewall rule.
Reset
Click Re se t t o st art configuring t his screen again.
See Appendix D on page 223 for com m only used services and port num bers.
132
NBG6503 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
18
Content Filter
18.1 Overview
This chapt er provides a brief overview of cont ent filt ering using t he em bedded web GUI .
I nt ernet cont ent filt ering allows you t o creat e and enforce I nt ernet access policies t ailored t o your
needs. Cont ent filt ering is t he abilit y t o block cert ain web feat ures or specific URL keywords.
18.2 What You Can Do
Use t he Cont e n t Filt e r ( Sect ion 18.4 on page 134) screen t o rest rict web feat ures, add
keywords for blocking and designat e a t rust ed com put er.
18.3 What You Need To Know
Cont ent filt ering allows you t o block cert ain web feat ures, such as cookies, and/ or block access t o
specific web sit es. For exam ple, you can configure one policy t hat blocks John Doe’s access t o art s
and ent ert ainm ent web pages.
18.3.1 Content Filtering Profiles
A cont ent filt ering profile convenient ly st ores your cust om set t ings for t he following feat ures.
Restrict Web Features
The Rout er can disable web proxies and block web feat ures such as Act iveX cont rols, Java applet s
and cookies.
Keyword Blocking URL Checking
The Rout er checks t he URL’s dom ain nam e ( or I P address) and file pat h separat ely when perform ing
keyword blocking.
The URL’s dom ain nam e or I P address is t he charact ers t hat com e before t he first slash in t he URL.
For exam ple, wit h t he URL www.zyxel.com .t w/ news/ pressroom .php, t he dom ain nam e is
www.zyxel.com .t w.
The file pat h is t he charact ers t hat com e aft er t he first slash in t he URL. For exam ple, wit h t he URL
www.zyxel.com .t w/ news/ pressroom .php, t he file pat h is news/ pressroom .php.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
133
Chapter 18 Content Filter
Since t he Rout er checks t he URL’s dom ain nam e ( or I P address) and file pat h separat ely, it will not
find it em s t hat go across t he t wo. For exam ple, wit h t he URL www.zyxel.com .t w/ news/
pressroom .php, t he Rout er would find “ t w” in t he dom ain nam e ( www.zyxel.com .t w) . I t would also
find “ news” in t he file pat h ( news/ pressroom .php) but it would not find “ t w/ news”.
18.4 Content Filter Screen
Use t his screen t o rest rict web feat ures, add keywords for blocking and designat e a t rust ed
com put er.
Click Se cur it y > Con t e nt Filt e r t o open t he Cont e nt Filt e r screen.
Figure 94 Securit y > Cont ent Filt er > Cont ent Filt er
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 57 Securit y > Cont ent Filt er > Cont ent Filt er
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Trust ed I P
Set up
To enable t his feat ure, t ype an I P address of any one of t he com put ers in your net work t hat
you want t o have as a t rust ed com put er. This allows t he t rust ed com put er t o have full
access t o all feat ures t hat are configured t o be blocked by cont ent filt ering.
Leave t his field blank t o have no t rust ed com put ers.
134
Rest rict Web
Feat ures
Select t he box( es) t o rest rict a feat ure. When you download a page cont aining a rest rict ed
feat ure, t hat part of t he web page will appear blank or grayed out .
Act iveX
A t ool for building dynam ic and act ive Web pages and dist ribut ed obj ect applicat ions. When
you visit an Act iveX Web sit e, Act iveX cont rols are downloaded t o your browser, where t hey
rem ain in case you visit t he sit e again.
Java
A program m ing language and developm ent environm ent for building downloadable Web
com ponent s or I nt ernet and int ranet business applicat ions of all kinds.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 18 Content Filter
Table 57 Securit y > Cont ent Filt er > Cont ent Filt er ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Cookies
Used by Web servers t o t rack usage and provide service based on I D.
Web Proxy
A server t hat act s as an int erm ediary bet ween a user and t he I nt ernet t o provide securit y,
adm inist rat ive cont rol, and caching service. When a proxy server is locat ed on t he WAN it is
possible for LAN users t o circum vent cont ent filt ering by point ing t o t his proxy server.
Enable URL
Keyword
Blocking
The Rout er can block Web sit es wit h URLs t hat cont ain cert ain keywords in t he dom ain nam e
or I P address. For exam ple, if t he keyword " bad" was enabled, all sit es cont aining t his
keyword in t he dom ain nam e or I P address will be blocked, e.g., URL ht t p: / /
www.websit e.com / bad.ht m l would be blocked. Select t his check box t o enable t his feat ure.
Keyword
Type a keyword in t his field. You m ay use any charact er ( up t o 64 charact ers) . Wildcards are
not allowed. You can also ent er a num erical I P address.
Keyword List
This list displays t he keywords already added.
Add
Click Add aft er you have t yped a keyword.
Repeat t his procedure t o add ot her keywords. Up t o 64 keywords are allowed.
When you t ry t o access a web page cont aining a keyword, you will get a m essage t elling you
t hat t he cont ent filt er is blocking t his request .
Delet e
Highlight a keyword in t he lower box and click D e le t e t o rem ove it . The keyword disappears
from t he t ext box aft er you click Apply.
Clear All
Click t his but t on t o rem ove all of t he list ed keywords.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes.
Reset
Click Re se t t o begin configuring t his screen afresh
NBG6503 User’s Guide
135
C HAPTER
19
Bandwidth Management
19.1 Overview
This chapt er cont ains inform at ion about configuring bandwidt h m anagem ent and edit ing rules.
ZyXEL’s Bandwidt h Managem ent allows you t o specify bandwidt h m anagem ent rules based on an
applicat ion.
I n t he figure below, uplink t raffic goes from t he LAN device ( A) t o t he WAN device ( B) . Bandwidt h
m anagem ent is applied before sending t he packet s out t o t he WAN. Downlink t raffic com es back
from t he WAN device ( B) t o t he LAN device ( A) . Bandwidt h m anagem ent is applied before sending
t he t raffic out t o LAN.
Figure 95 Bandwidt h Managem ent Exam ple
-> VOIP
-> FTP
-> HTTP
-> Chat, Email
You can allocat e specific am ount s of bandwidt h capacit y ( bandwidt h budget s) t o individual
applicat ions ( like VoI P, Web, FTP, and E- m ail for exam ple) .
19.2 What You Can Do
• Use t he Ge n e r a l screen ( Sect ion 19.4 on page 138) t o enable bandwidt h m anagem ent and
assign bandwidt h values.
• Use t he Adva nce d screen ( Sect ion 19.5 on page 138) t o configure bandwidt h m anagem ent s rule
for t he pre- defined services and applicat ions.
• Use t he M on it or screen ( Sect ion 19.6 on page 143) t o view t he am ount of net work bandwidt h
t hat applicat ions running in t he net work are using.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
137
Chapter 19 Bandwidth Management
19.3 What You Need To Know
The sum of t he bandwidt h allot m ent s t hat apply t o t he WAN int erface ( LAN t o WAN, WLAN t o WAN)
m ust be less t han or equal t o t he Upst r e a m Ba ndw idt h t hat you configure in t he Ba n dw idt h
M a na ge m e nt Adva nce d screen ( Sect ion 19.5 on page 138) .
The sum of t he bandwidt h allot m ent s t hat apply t o t he LAN int erface ( WAN t o LAN, WAN t o WLAN)
m ust be less t han or equal t o t he D ow nst r e a m Ba n dw idt h t hat you configure in t he Ba ndw idt h
M a na ge m e nt Adva nce d screen Sect ion 19.5 on page 138.
19.4 General Screen
Use t his screen t o have t he Rout er apply bandwidt h m anagem ent .
Click M a na ge m e nt > Ba ndw idt h M a n a ge m e n t t o open t he bandwidt h m anagem ent Ge n e r a l
screen.
Figure 96 Managem ent > Bandwidt h Managem ent > General
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 58 Managem ent > Bandwidt h Managem ent > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable
Bandw idt h
Managem ent
This field allows you t o have Rout er apply bandwidt h m anagem ent .
Enable bandwidt h m anagem ent t o give t raffic t hat m at ches a bandwidt h rule priorit y over
t raffic t hat does not m at ch a bandwidt h rule.
Enabling bandwidt h m anagem ent also allows you t o cont rol t he m axim um or m inim um
am ount s of bandwidt h t hat can be used by t raffic t hat m at ches a bandwidt h rule.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your cust om ized set t ings.
Reset
Click Re se t t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.
19.5 Advanced Screen
Use t his screen t o configure bandwidt h m anagem ent rules for t he pre- defined services or
applicat ions.
You can also use t his screen t o configure bandwidt h m anagem ent rule for ot her services or
applicat ions t hat are not on t he pre- defined list of Rout er. Addit ionally, you can define t he source
and dest inat ion I P addresses and port for a service or applicat ion.
138
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 19 Bandwidth Management
Not e: The t w o t ables shown in t his screen can be configured and applied at t he sam e
t im e.
Click M a na ge m e nt > Ba n dw idt h M a n a ge m e n t > Adva nce d t o open t he bandwidt h
m anagem ent Adva nce d screen.
Figure 97 Managem ent > Bandwidt h Managem ent > Advanced
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
139
Chapter 19 Bandwidth Management
Table 59 Managem ent > Bandwidt h Managem ent > Advanced
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Managem ent Bandwidt h
Upst ream
Bandw idt h
Select t he t ot al am ount of bandwidt h ( from 64 Kilobit s t o 50 Megabit s) t hat you want t o
dedicat e t o uplink t raffic.
This is t raffic from LAN/ WLAN t o WAN.
Downst ream
Bandw idt h
Select t he t ot al am ount of bandwidt h ( from 64 Kilobit s t o 50 Megabit s) t hat you want t o
dedicat e t o uplink t raffic.
This is t raffic from WAN t o LAN/ WLAN.
Applicat ion List
Use t his t able t o allocat e specific am ount s of bandwidt h based on a pre- defined service.
This is t he num ber of an individual bandwidt h m anagem ent rule.
Priorit y
Select a priorit y from t he drop down list box. Choose H igh , M id or Low .
•
•
•
H igh - Select t his for voice t raffic or video t hat is especially sensit ive t o j it t er ( j it t er is
t he variat ions in delay) .
M id - Select t his for " excellent effort " or bet t er t han best effort and would include
im port ant business t raffic t hat can t olerat e som e delay.
Low - Select t his for non- crit ical " background" t raffic such as bulk t ransfers t hat are
allowed but t hat should not affect ot her applicat ions and users.
Cat egory
This is t he cat egory where a service belongs.
Service
This is t he nam e of t he service.
Select t he check box t o have t he Rout er apply t his bandwidt h m anagem ent rule.
Advanced
Set t ing
Click t he Edit icon t o open t he Rule Con figu r a t ion screen where you can m odify t he rule.
User- defined
Service
Use t his t able t o allocat e specific am ount s of bandwidt h t o specific applicat ions or services
you specify.
This is t he num ber of an individual bandwidt h m anagem ent rule.
Enable
Select t his check box t o have t he Rout er apply t his bandwidt h m anagem ent rule.
Direct ion
Select TO LAN / W LAN t o apply bandwidt h m anagem ent t o t raffic from WAN t o LAN/ WLAN.
Select TO W AN t o apply bandwidt h m anagem ent t o t raffic from LAN/ WLAN t o WAN.
Service Nam e
Ent er a descript ive nam e for t he bandwidt h m anagem ent rule.
Cat egory
This is t he cat egory where a service belongs.
Modify
Click t he Edit icon t o open t he Rule Con figu r a t ion screen. Modify an exist ing rule or
creat e a new rule in t he Ru le Configu r a t ion screen. See Sect ion 19.5.2 on page 142 for
m ore inform at ion.
Click t he Re m ove icon t o delet e a rule.
140
Apply
Click Apply t o save your cust om ized set t ings.
Reset
Click Re se t t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 19 Bandwidth Management
19.5.1 Rule Configuration: Application Rule Configuration
I f you want t o edit a bandwidt h m anagem ent rule for a pre- defined service or applicat ion, click t he
Edit icon in t he Applica t ion List t able of t he Adva nce d screen. The following screen displays.
Figure 98 Bandwidt h Managem ent Rule Configurat ion: Applicat ion List
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 60 Bandwidt h Managem ent Rule Configurat ion: Applicat ion List
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is t he num ber of an individual bandwidt h m anagem ent rule.
Enable
Select an int erface’s check box t o enable bandwidt h m anagem ent on t hat int erface.
Direct ion
These read- only labels represent t he physical int erfaces. Bandwidt h m anagem ent applies t o
all t raffic flowing out of t he rout er t hrough t he int erface, regardless of t he t raffic’s source.
Traffic redirect or I P alias m ay cause LAN- t o- LAN t raffic t o pass t hrough t he Rout er and be
m anaged by bandwidt h m anagem ent .
Bandwidt h
Select M a x im um Ba ndw idt h or M in im u m Ba n dw idt h and specify t he m axim um or
m inim um bandwidt h allowed for t he rule in kilobit s per second.
Dest inat ion Port
This is t he port num ber of t he dest inat ion t hat define t he t raffic t ype, for exam ple TCP port
80 defines web t raffic.
See Appendix D on page 223 for som e com m on services and port num bers.
Source Port
This is t he port num ber of t he source t hat define t he t raffic t ype, for exam ple TCP port 80
defines web t raffic.
See Appendix D on page 223 for som e com m on services and port num bers.
Prot ocol
This is t he prot ocol ( TCP, UD P or user- defined) used for t he service.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your cust om ized set t ings.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l t o exit t his screen wit hout saving.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
141
Chapter 19 Bandwidth Management
19.5.2 Rule Configuration: User Defined Service Rule Configuration
I f you want t o edit a bandwidt h m anagem ent rule for ot her applicat ions or services, click t he Edit
icon in t he Use r - de fine d Se r vice t able of t he Adva nce d screen. The following screen displays.
Figure 99 Bandwidt h Managem ent Rule Configurat ion: User- defined Service
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen
Table 61 Bandwidt h Managem ent Rule Configurat ion: User- defined Service
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
BW Budget
Select M a x im u m Ba n dw idt h or M in im um Ba n dw idt h and specify t he m axim um or
m inim um bandwidt h allowed for t he rule in kilobit s per second.
Dest inat ion
Address
Ent er t he I P address of t he dest inat ion com put er.
Dest inat ion
Subnet
Net m ask
Ent er t he subnet net m ask of t he dest inat ion of t he t raffic for which t he bandwidt h
m anagem ent rule applies.
Dest inat ion
Port
This is t he port num ber of t he dest inat ion t hat define t he t raffic t ype, for exam ple TCP port
80 defines web t raffic.
Source Address
Ent er t he I P address of t he com put er t hat init ializes t raffic for t he applicat ion or service.
The Rout er applies bandwidt h m anagem ent t o t he service or applicat ion t hat is ent ering t his
com put er.
The Rout er applies bandwidt h m anagem ent t o t raffic init iat ing from t his com put er.
Source Subnet
Net m ask
Ent er t he subnet net m ask of t he com put er init iat ing t he t raffic for which t he bandwidt h
m anagem ent rule applies.
Source Port
This is t he port num ber of t he source t hat define t he t raffic t ype, for exam ple TCP port 80
defines web t raffic.
Prot ocol
Select t he prot ocol ( TCP, UD P, Use r de fin e d) for which t he bandwidt h m anagem ent rule
applies.
I f you select Use r - de fin e d, ent er t he prot ocol for which t he bandwidt h m anagem ent rule
applies. For exam ple, I CMP for ping t raffic.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your cust om ized set t ings.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l t o exit t his screen wit hout saving.
See Appendix D on page 223 for com m only used services and port num bers.
142
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 19 Bandwidth Management
19.6 Monitor Screen
Use t his screen t o view t he am ount of net work bandwidt h t hat applicat ions running in t he net work
are using.
The bandwidt h is m easured in kilobit s per second ( kbps) .
The m onit or shows what kinds of applicat ions are running in t he net work, t he m axim um kbps t hat
each applicat ion can use, as well as t he percent age of bandwidt h it is using.
Figure 100 Managem ent > Bandwidt h Managem ent > Monit or
19.6.1 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services
The following is a descript ion of som e services t hat you can select and t o which you can apply
m edia bandwidt h m anagem ent in t he M a n a ge m e n t > Ba n dw idt h M a na ge m e n t > Adva nce d
screen.
Table 62 Media Bandwidt h Managem ent Set up: Services
SERVICE
DESCRIPTION
FTP
File Transfer Program enables fast t ransfer of files, including large files t hat m ay not be
possible by e- m ail.
WWW
The World Wide Web ( WWW) is an I nt ernet syst em t o dist ribut e graphical, hyper- linked
inform at ion, based on Hyper Text Transfer Prot ocol ( HTTP) - a client / server prot ocol for t he
World Wide Web. The Web is not synonym ous wit h t he I nt ernet ; rat her, it is j ust one service
on t he I nt ernet . Ot her services on t he I nt ernet include I nt ernet Relay Chat and
Newsgroups. The Web is accessed t hrough use of a browser.
E- Mail
Elect ronic m ail consist s of m essages sent t hrough a com put er net work t o specific groups or
individuals. Here are som e default port s for e- m ail:
VoI P ( SI P)
Sending voice signals over t he I nt ernet is called Voice over I P or VoI P. Session I nit iat ed
Prot ocol ( SI P) is an int ernat ionally recognized st andard for im plem ent ing VoI P. SI P is an
applicat ion- layer cont rol ( signaling) prot ocol t hat handles t he set t ing up, alt ering and
t earing down of voice and m ult im edia sessions over t he I nt ernet .
SI P is t ransport ed prim arily over UDP but can also be t ransport ed over TCP.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
143
Chapter 19 Bandwidth Management
Table 62 Media Bandwidt h Managem ent Set up: Services ( cont inued)
144
SERVICE
DESCRIPTION
Bit Torrent
Bit Torrent is a free P2P ( peer- t o- peer) sharing t ool allowing you t o dist ribut e large soft ware
and m edia files. Bit Torrent requires you t o search for a file wit h a searching engine yourself.
I t dist ribut es files by corporat ion and t rading, t hat is, t he client downloads t he file in sm all
pieces and share t he pieces wit h ot her peers t o get ot her half of t he file.
Gam ing
Online gam ing services let s you play m ult iplayer gam es on t he I nt ernet via broadband
t echnology. As of t his writ ing, your Rout er support s Xbox, Playst at ion, Bat t lenet and MSN
Gam e Zone.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
20
Remote Management
20.1 Overview
This chapt er provides inform at ion on t he Rem ot e Managem ent screens.
Rem ot e Managem ent allows you t o m anage your Rout er from a rem ot e locat ion t hrough t he
following int erfaces:
• LAN and WAN
• LAN only
• WAN only
Not e: The Rout er is m anaged using t he Web Configurat or.
20.2 What You Can Do
Use t he W W W screen ( Sect ion 20.4 on page 146) t o define t he int erface/ s from which t he Rout er
can be m anaged rem ot ely and specify a secure client t hat can m anage t he Rout er.
20.3 What You Need to Know
Rem ot e m anagem ent over LAN or WAN will not work when:
The I P address in t he Se cu r e d Clie n t I P Addr e ss field ( Sect ion 20.4 on page 146) does not
m at ch t he client I P address. I f it does not m at ch, t he Rout er will disconnect t he session
im m ediat ely.
There is already anot her rem ot e m anagem ent session. You m ay only have one rem ot e
m anagem ent session running at one t im e.
There is a firewall rule t hat blocks it .
20.3.1 Remote Management and NAT
When NAT is enabled:
• Use t he Rout er’s WAN I P address when configuring from t he WAN.
• Use t he Rout er’s LAN I P address when configuring from t he LAN.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
145
Chapter 20 Remote Management
20.3.2 System Timeout
There is a default syst em m anagem ent idle t im eout of five m inut es ( t hree hundred seconds) . The
Rout er aut om at ically logs you out if t he m anagem ent session rem ains idle for longer t han t his
t im eout period. The m anagem ent session does not t im e out when a st at ist ics screen is polling. You
can change t he t im eout period in t he Syst e m screen
20.4 WWW Screen
To change your Rout er’s rem ot e m anagem ent set t ings, click M a n a ge m e n t > Re m ot e
M a na ge m e nt > W W W.
Figure 101 Managem ent > Rem ot e Managem ent > WWW
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen
Table 63 Managem ent > Rem ot e Managem ent > WWW
146
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Server Port
You m ay change t he server port num ber for a service if needed, how ever you m ust use t he
sam e port num ber in order t o use t hat service for rem ot e m anagem ent .
Server Access
Select t he int erface( s) t hrough which a com put er m ay access t he Rout er using t his service.
Secured Client
I P Address
Select All t o allow all com put es t o access t he Rout er.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your cust om ized set t ings and exit t his screen.
Reset
Click Re se t t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.
Ot herwise, check Se le ct e d and specify t he I P address of t he com put er t hat can access t he
Rout er.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
21
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
21.1 Overview
This chapt er int roduces t he UPnP feat ure in t he web configurat or.
Universal Plug and Play ( UPnP) is a dist ribut ed, open net working st andard t hat uses TCP/ I P for
sim ple peer- t o- peer net work connect ivit y bet ween devices. A UPnP device can dynam ically j oin a
net work, obt ain an I P address, convey it s capabilit ies and learn about ot her devices on t he net work.
I n t urn, a device can leave a net work sm oot hly and aut om at ically when it is no longer in use.
21.2 What You Can Do
Use t he UPnP screen ( Sect ion 21.4 on page 148) t o enable UPnP on your Rout er.
21.3 What You Need to Know
UPnP hardware is ident ified as an icon in t he Net work Connect ions folder ( Windows XP) . Each UPnP
com pat ible device inst alled on your net work will appear as a separat e icon. Select ing t he icon of a
UPnP device will allow you t o access t he inform at ion and propert ies of t hat device.
21.3.1 NAT Traversal
UPnP NAT t raversal aut om at es t he process of allowing an applicat ion t o operat e t hrough NAT. UPnP
net work devices can aut om at ically configure net work addressing, announce t heir presence in t he
net work t o ot her UPnP devices and enable exchange of sim ple product and service descript ions.
NAT t raversal allows t he following:
• Dynam ic port m apping
• Learning public I P addresses
• Assigning lease t im es t o m appings
Windows Messenger is an exam ple of an applicat ion t hat support s NAT t raversal and UPnP.
See t he NAT chapt er for m ore inform at ion on NAT.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
147
Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
21.3.2 Cautions with UPnP
The aut om at ed nat ure of NAT t raversal applicat ions in est ablishing t heir own services and opening
firewall port s m ay present net work securit y issues. Net work inform at ion and configurat ion m ay also
be obt ained and m odified by users in som e net work environm ent s.
When a UPnP device j oins a net work, it announces it s presence wit h a m ult icast m essage. For
securit y reasons, t he Rout er allows m ult icast m essages on t he LAN only.
All UPnP- enabled devices m ay com m unicat e freely wit h each ot her wit hout addit ional configurat ion.
Disable UPnP if t his is not your int ent ion.
21.4 UPnP Screen
Use t his screen t o enable UPnP on your Rout er.
Click M a n a ge m e nt > UPnP t o display t he screen shown next .
Figure 102 Managem ent > UPnP
The following t able describes t he fields in t his screen.
Table 64 Managem ent > UPnP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable t he
Universal Plug
and Play
( UPnP) Feat ure
Select t his check box t o act ivat e UPnP. Be aware t hat anyone could use a UPnP applicat ion
t o open t he web configurat or's login screen wit hout ent ering t he Rout er's I P address
( alt hough you m ust st ill ent er t he password t o access t he web configurat or) .
Apply
Click Apply t o save t he set t ing t o t he Rout er.
Reset
Click Re se t t o ret urn t o t he previously saved set t ings.
21.5 Technical Refereance
The sect ions show exam ples of using UPnP.
21.5.1 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example
This sect ion shows you how t o use t he UPnP feat ure in Windows XP. You m ust already have UPnP
inst alled in Windows XP and UPnP act ivat ed on t he Rout er.
148
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
Make sure t he com put er is connect ed t o a LAN port of t he Rout er. Turn on your com put er and t he
Rout er.
21.5.1.1 Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device
Click st a r t and Cont r ol Pa ne l. Double- click N e t w or k Con n e ct ions. An icon displays under
I nt ernet Gat eway.
Right- click t he icon and select Pr ope r t ie s.
Figure 103 Net work Connect ions
I n t he I nt e r ne t Conne ct ion Pr ope r t ie s window, click Se t t ings t o see t he port m appings t here
were aut om at ically creat ed.
Figure 104 I nt ernet Connect ion Propert ies
NBG6503 User’s Guide
149
Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
You m ay edit or delet e t he port m appings or click Add t o m anually add port m appings.
Figure 105 I nt ernet Connect ion Propert ies: Advanced Set t ings
Figure 106 I nt ernet Connect ion Propert ies: Advanced Set t ings: Add
Not e: When t he UPnP- enabled device is disconnect ed from your com put er, all port
m appings will be delet ed aut om at ically.
Select Sh ow icon in not ifica t ion a r e a w he n conn e ct e d opt ion and click OK. An icon displays in
t he syst em t ray.
Figure 107 Syst em Tray I con
150
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
Double- click on t he icon t o display your current I nt ernet connect ion st at us.
Figure 108 I nt ernet Connect ion St at us
21.5.2 Web Configurator Easy Access
Wit h UPnP, you can access t he web- based configurat or on t he Rout er wit hout finding out t he I P
address of t he Rout er first . This com es helpful if you do not know t he I P address of t he Rout er.
Follow t he st eps below t o access t he web configurat or.
Click St a r t and t hen Cont r ol Pa ne l.
Double- click N e t w or k Conne ct ions.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
151
Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
Select M y N e t w or k Pla ce s under Ot h e r Pla ce s.
Figure 109 Net work Connect ions
An icon wit h t he descript ion for each UPnP- enabled device displays under Loca l N e t w or k .
Right- click on t he icon for your Rout er and select I n vok e . The web configurat or login screen
displays.
Figure 110 Net work Connect ions: My Net work Places
152
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
Right- click on t he icon for your Rout er and select Pr ope r t ie s. A propert ies window displays wit h
basic inform at ion about t he Rout er.
Figure 111 Net work Connect ions: My Net work Places: Propert ies: Exam ple
NBG6503 User’s Guide
153
C HAPTER
22
Maintenance
22.1 Overview
This chapt er provides inform at ion on t he M a int e na nce screens.
22.2 What You Can Do
• Use t he Ge n e r a l screen t o configure syst em and dom ain nam e. You can also set t he t im eout
period of t he m anagem ent session ( Sect ion 22.3 on page 155) .
• Use t he Pa ssw or d screen t o change your Rout er’s syst em password ( Sect ion 22.4 on page 156) .
• Use t he Tim e screen t o change your Rout er’s t im e and dat e ( Sect ion 22.5 on page 157) .
• Use t he Fir m w a r e Upgr a de screen t o upload firm ware t o your Rout er ( Sect ion 22.6 on page
158) .
• Use t he Ba ck u p/ Re st or e screen t o view inform at ion relat ed t o fact ory default s, backup
configurat ion, and rest oring configurat ion ( Sect ion 22.8 on page 161) .
• Use t he Re st a r t screen t o reboot t he Rout er wit hout t urning t he power off ( Sect ion 22.8 on page
161) .
• Use t he Sys OP M ode screen t o select how you want t o use your Rout er ( Sect ion 22.10 on page
163) .
22.3 General Screen
Use t his screen t o set t he configure syst em and dom ain nam e as well as m anagem ent session
t im eout period. Click M a int e na nce > Ge n e r a l. The following screen displays.
Figure 112 Maint enance > General
NBG6503 User’s Guide
155
Chapter 22 Maintenance
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 65 Maint enance > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Syst em Set up
Syst em Nam e
Syst em Nam e is a unique nam e t o ident ify t he Rout er in an Et hernet net work.
Dom ain Nam e
Ent er t he dom ain nam e you want t o give t o t he Rout er.
Adm inist rat or
I nact ivit y Tim er
Type how m any m inut es a m anagem ent session can be left idle before t he
session t im es out . The default is 5 m inut es. Aft er it t im es out you have t o log in
wit h your password again. Very long idle t im eout s m ay have securit y risks. A
value of " 0" m eans a m anagem ent session never t im es out , no m at t er how long
it has been left idle ( not recom m ended) .
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.
22.4 Password Screen
I t is st rongly recom m ended t hat you change your Rout er's password.
I f you forget your Rout er's password ( or I P address) , you will need t o reset t he device. See Sect ion
22.8 on page 161 for det ails.
Click M a int e na nce > Pa ssw or d. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 113 Maint enance > Password
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 66 Maint enance > Password
156
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Password Set up
Change your Rout er’s password ( recom m ended) using t he fields as shown.
Old Password
Type t he default password or t he exist ing password you use t o access t he syst em in t his
field.
New Password
Type your new syst em password ( up t o 30 charact ers) . Not e t hat as you t ype a password,
t he screen displays an ast erisk ( * ) for each charact er you t ype.
Ret ype t o
Confirm
Type t he new password again in t his field.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Reset
Click Re se t t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Maintenance
22.5 Time Setting Screen
Use t his screen t o configure t he Rout er’s t im e based on your local t im e zone. To change your
Rout er’s t im e and dat e, click M a int e n a n ce > Tim e . The screen appears as shown.
Figure 114 Maint enance > Tim e
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 67 Maint enance > Tim e
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Current Tim e and Dat e
Current Tim e
This field displays t he t im e of your Rout er.
Each t im e you reload t his page, t he Rout er synchronizes t he t im e wit h t he t im e server.
Current Dat e
This field displays t he dat e of your Rout er.
Each t im e you reload t his page, t he Rout er synchronizes t he dat e wit h t he t im e server.
Current Tim e and Dat e
Manual
Select t his radio but t on t o ent er t he t im e and dat e m anually. I f you configure a new t im e
and dat e, Tim e Zone and Daylight Saving at t he sam e t im e, t he new t im e and dat e you
ent ered has priorit y and t he Tim e Zone and Daylight Saving set t ings do not affect it .
New Tim e
This field displays t he last updat ed t im e from t he t im e server or t he last t im e configured
m anually.
( hh: m m : ss)
When you select M a n u a l, ent er t he new t im e in t his field and t hen click Apply.
New Dat e
( yyyy/ m m / dd)
This field displays t he last updat ed dat e from t he t im e server or t he last dat e configured
m anually.
When you select M a n u a l, ent er t he new dat e in t his field and t hen click Apply.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
157
Chapter 22 Maintenance
Table 67 Maint enance > Tim e ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Get from Tim e
Server
Select t his radio but t on t o have t he Rout er get t he t im e and dat e from t he t im e server
you specified below.
Aut o
Select Au t o t o have t he Rout er aut om at ically search for an available t im e server and
synchronize t he dat e and t im e wit h t he t im e server aft er you click Apply.
User Defined Tim e
Server Address
Select Use r D e fin e d Tim e Se r ve r Addr e ss and ent er t he I P address or URL ( up t o 20
ext ended ASCI I charact ers in lengt h) of your t im e server. Check wit h your I SP/ net work
adm inist rat or if you are unsure of t his inform at ion.
Tim e Zone Set up
Tim e Zone
Choose t he t im e zone of your locat ion. This will set t he t im e difference bet ween your t im e
zone and Greenwich Mean Tim e ( GMT) .
Daylight Savings
Daylight saving is a period from lat e spring t o early fall when m any count ries set t heir
clocks ahead of norm al local t im e by one hour t o give m ore dayt im e light in t he evening.
St art Dat e
Configure t he day and t im e when Daylight Saving Tim e st art s if you select ed D a yligh t
Sa vin gs. The o'clock field uses t he 24 hour form at . Here are a couple of exam ples:
Select t his opt ion if you use Daylight Saving Tim e.
Daylight Saving Tim e st art s in m ost part s of t he Unit ed St at es on t he first Sunday of
April. Each t im e zone in t he Unit ed St at es st art s using Daylight Saving Tim e at 2 A.M.
local t im e. So in t he Unit ed St at es you would select Fir st , Sun da y, Apr il and select 2 in
t he o' clock field.
Daylight Saving Tim e st art s in t he European Union on t he last Sunday of March. All of t he
t im e zones in t he European Union st art using Daylight Saving Tim e at t he sam e m om ent
( 1 A.M. GMT or UTC) . So in t he European Union you would select La st , Su n da y, M a r ch .
The t im e you select in t he o'clock field depends on your t im e zone. I n Germ any for
inst ance, you would select 2 because Germ any's t im e zone is one hour ahead of GMT or
UTC ( GMT+ 1) .
End Dat e
Configure t he day and t im e when Daylight Saving Tim e ends if you select ed D a ylight
Sa vin gs. The o'clock field uses t he 24 hour form at . Here are a couple of exam ples:
Daylight Saving Tim e ends in t he Unit ed St at es on t he last Sunday of Oct ober. Each t im e
zone in t he Unit ed St at es st ops using Daylight Saving Tim e at 2 A.M. local t im e. So in t he
Unit ed St at es you would select La st , Su n da y, Oct obe r and select 2 in t he o'clock field.
Daylight Saving Tim e ends in t he European Union on t he last Sunday of Oct ober. All of t he
t im e zones in t he European Union st op using Daylight Saving Tim e at t he sam e m om ent
( 1 A.M. GMT or UTC) . So in t he European Union you would select La st , Su n da y,
Oct obe r. The t im e you select in t he o'clock field depends on your t im e zone. I n
Germ any for inst ance, you would select 2 because Germ any's t im e zone is one hour
ahead of GMT or UTC ( GMT+ 1) .
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he Rout er.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.
22.6 Firmware Upgrade Screen
Find firm ware at www.zyxel.com in a file t hat ( usually) uses t he syst em m odel nam e wit h a “ * .bin”
ext ension, e.g., “ Rout er.bin”. The upload process uses HTTP ( Hypert ext Transfer Prot ocol) and m ay
t ake up t o t wo m inut es. Aft er a successful upload, t he syst em will reboot .
158
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Maintenance
Click M a int e na nce > Fir m w a r e Upgr a de . Follow t he inst ruct ions in t his screen t o upload
firm ware t o your Rout er.
Figure 115 Maint enance > Firm ware Upgrade
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 68 Maint enance > Firm ware Upgrade
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
File Pat h
Type in t he locat ion of t he file you want t o upload in t his field or click Br ow se ... t o find it .
Browse...
Click Br ow se ... t o find t he .bin file you want t o upload. Rem em ber t hat you m ust
decom press com pressed ( .zip) files before you can upload t hem .
Upload
Click Uploa d t o begin t he upload process. This process m ay t ake up t o t wo m inut es.
Check for
Lat est
Firm ware Now
Click t his t o check for t he lat est updat ed firm ware.
Not e: Do not t urn off t he Rout er while firm ware upload is in progress!
Aft er you see t he Fir m w a r e Uploa d I n Pr oce ss screen, wait t wo m inut es before logging int o t he
Rout er again.
The Rout er aut om at ically rest art s in t his t im e causing a t em porary net work disconnect . I n som e
operat ing syst em s, you m ay see t he following icon on your deskt op.
Figure 116 Net work Tem porarily Disconnect ed
Aft er t wo m inut es, log in again and check your new firm ware version in t he St a t us screen.
I f t he upload was not successful, an error m essage appears. Click Re t ur n t o go back t o t he
Fir m w a r e Upgr a de screen.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
159
Chapter 22 Maintenance
22.7 Configuration Backup/Restore Screen
Backup configurat ion allows you t o back up ( save) t he Rout er’s current configurat ion t o a file on
your com put er. Once your Rout er is configured and funct ioning properly, it is highly recom m ended
t hat you back up your configurat ion file before m aking configurat ion changes. The backup
configurat ion file will be useful in case you need t o ret urn t o your previous set t ings.
Rest ore configurat ion allows you t o upload a new or previously saved configurat ion file from your
com put er t o your Rout er.
Click M a in t e n a n ce > Ba ck u p/ Re st or e . I nform at ion relat ed t o fact ory default s, backup
configurat ion, and rest oring configurat ion appears as shown next .
Figure 117 Maint enance > Backup/ Rest ore
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 69 Maint enance > Backup/ Rest ore
160
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Backup
Click Ba ck u p t o save t he Rout er’s current configurat ion t o your com put er.
File Pat h
Type in t he locat ion of t he file you want t o upload in t his field or click Br ow se ... t o find it .
Browse...
Click Br ow se ... t o find t he file you want t o upload. Rem em ber t hat you m ust decom press
com pressed ( .ZI P) files before you can upload t hem .
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Maintenance
Table 69 Maint enance > Backup/ Rest ore ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Upload
Click Uploa d t o begin t he upload process.
Note: Do not turn off the Router while configuration file upload is in progress.
Aft er you see a “ configurat ion upload successful” screen, you m ust t hen wait one m inut e
before logging int o t he Rout er again. The Rout er aut om at ically rest art s in t his t im e causing
a t em porary net work disconnect .
I f you see an error screen, click Back t o ret urn t o t he Backup/ Rest ore screen.
Reset
Pressing t he Re se t but t on in t his sect ion clears all user- ent ered configurat ion inform at ion
and ret urns t he Rout er t o it s fact ory default s.
You can also press t he RESET but t on on t he rear panel t o reset t he fact ory default s of your
Rout er. Refer t o t he chapt er about int roducing t he Web Configurat or for m ore inform at ion
on t he RESET but t on.
Not e: I f you uploaded t he default configurat ion file you m ay need t o change t he I P
address of your com put er t o be in t he sam e subnet as t hat of t he default Rout er I P
address ( 192.168.1.2) . See Appendix B on page 181 for det ails on how t o set up
your com put er ’s I P address.
22.8 Restart Screen
Syst em rest art allows you t o reboot t he Rout er wit hout t urning t he power off.
Click M a int e na nce > Re st a r t t o open t he following screen.
Figure 118 Maint enance > Rest art
Click Re st a r t t o have t he Rout er reboot . This does not affect t he Rout er's configurat ion.
22.9 System Operation Mode Overview
The Sys OP M ode ( Syst em Operat ion Mode) funct ion let s you configure your Rout er as an access
point , wireless client or bot h at t he sam e t im e. You can choose bet ween Rou t e r and Acce ss Point
M ode depending on your net work t opology and t he feat ures you require from your device.
The following describes t he device m odes available in your Rout er.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
161
Chapter 22 Maintenance
Router
A rout er connect s your local net work wit h anot her net work, such as t he I nt ernet . The rout er has
t wo I P addresses, t he LAN I P address and t he WAN I P address.
Figure 119 LAN and WAN I P Addresses in Rout er Mode
Access Point
An access point enabled all et hernet port s t o be bridged t oget her and be in t he sam e subnet . To
connect t o t he I nt ernet , anot her device, such as a rout er, is required.
Figure 120 Access Point Mode
162
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Maintenance
22.10 Sys OP Mode Screen
Use t his screen t o select how you want t o use your Rout er.
Figure 121 Maint enance > Sys OP Mode
The following t able describes t he labels in t he Ge n e r a l screen.
Table 70 Maint enance > Sys OP Mode
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Syst em Operat ion Mode
Rout er
Select Rou t e r M ode if your device rout es t raffic bet ween a local net work and anot her
net work such as t he I nt ernet . This m ode offers services such as a firewall or bandwidt h
m anagem ent .
You can configure t he I P address set t ings on your WAN port . Cont act your I SP or syst em
adm inist rat or for m ore inform at ion on appropriat e set t ings.
Access Point
Select Acce ss Poin t M ode if your device bridges t raffic bet ween client s on t he sam e
net work.
•
•
•
•
I n Acce ss Poin t M ode , all Et hernet port s have t he sam e I P address.
All port s on t he rear panel of t he device are LAN port s, including t he port labeled WAN.
There is no WAN port .
The DHCP server on your device is disabled.
The I P address of t he device on t he local net work is set t o 192.168.1.2.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your set t ings.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l t o ret urn your set t ings t o t he default ( Rou t e r ) .
Not e: I f you select t he incorrect Syst em Operat ion Mode you m ay not be able t o connect
t o t he I nt ernet .
NBG6503 User’s Guide
163
C HAPTER
23
Troubleshooting
This chapt er offers som e suggest ions t o solve problem s you m ight encount er. The pot ent ial
problem s are divided int o t he following cat egories.
• Power, Hardware Connect ions, and LEDs
• Rout er Access and Login
• I nt ernet Access
• Reset t ing t he Rout er t o I t s Fact ory Default s
• Wireless Rout er/ AP Troubleshoot ing
23.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
The Rout er does not t urn on. None of t he LEDs t urn on.
Make sure you are using t he power adapt or or cord included wit h t he Rout er.
Make sure t he power adapt or or cord is connect ed t o t he Rout er and plugged in t o an appropriat e
power source. Make sure t he power source is t urned on.
Disconnect and re- connect t he power adapt or or cord t o t he Rout er.
I f t he problem cont inues, cont act t he vendor.
One of t he LEDs does not behave as expect ed.
Make sure you underst and t he norm al behavior of t he LED. See Sect ion 1.5 on page 17.
Check t he hardware connect ions. See t he Quick St art Guide.
I nspect your cables for dam age. Cont act t he vendor t o replace any dam aged cables.
Disconnect and re- connect t he power adapt or t o t he Rout er.
I f t he problem cont inues, cont act t he vendor.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
165
Chapter 23 Troubleshooting
23.2 Router Access and Login
I don’t know t he I P address of m y Rout er.
The default I P address is 1 9 2 .1 6 8 .1 .1 .
I f you changed t he I P address and have forgot t en it , you m ight get t he I P address of t he Rout er by
looking up t he I P address of t he default gat eway for your com put er. To do t his in m ost Windows
com put ers, click St a r t > Run , ent er cm d, and t hen ent er ipconfig. The I P address of t he D e fa ult
Ga t e w a y m ight be t he I P address of t he Rout er ( it depends on t he net work) , so ent er t his I P
address in your I nt ernet browser.Set your device t o Rout e r M ode , login ( see t he Quick St art Guide
for inst ruct ions) and go t o t he D e vice I n for m a t ion t able in t he St a t u s screen. Your Rout er’s I P
address is available in t he D e vice I nfor m a t ion t able.
• I f t he D H CP set t ing under LAN in for m a t ion is N on e , your device has a fixed I P address.
• I f t he D H CP set t ing under LAN infor m a t ion is Clie n t , t hen your device receives an I P
address from a DHCP server on t he net work.
I f your Rout er is a DHCP client , you can find your I P address from t he DHCP server. This inform at ion
is only available from t he DHCP server which allocat es I P addresses on your net work. Find t his
inform at ion direct ly from t he DHCP server or cont act your syst em adm inist rat or for m ore
inform at ion.
Reset your Rout er t o change all set t ings back t o t heir default . This m eans your current set t ings are
lost . See Sect ion 23.4 on page 169 in t he Tr ou ble shoot ing for inform at ion on reset t ing your
Rout er.
I forgot t he passwor d.
The default password is 1 2 3 4 .
I f t his does not work, you have t o reset t he device t o it s fact ory default s. See Sect ion 23.4 on page
169.
I cannot see or access t he Login screen in t he Web Configurat or.
Make sure you are using t he correct I P address.
• The default I P address is 192.168.1.1.
• I f you changed t he I P address ( Sect ion 12.4 on page 111) , use t he new I P address.
• I f you changed t he I P address and have forgot t en it , see t he t roubleshoot ing suggest ions for I
don’t know t he I P address of m y Rout er.
166
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 23 Troubleshooting
Check t he hardware connect ions, and m ake sure t he LEDs are behaving as expect ed. See t he Quick
St art Guide.
Make sure your I nt ernet browser does not block pop- up windows and has JavaScript and Java
enabled. See Appendix A on page 173.
Make sure your com put er is in t he sam e subnet as t he Rout er. ( I f you know t hat t here are rout ers
bet ween your com put er and t he Rout er, skip t his st ep.)
• I f t here is a DHCP server on your net work, m ake sure your com put er is using a dynam ic I P
address. See Appendix B on page 181.
• I f t here is no DHCP server on your net work, m ake sure your com put er ’s I P address is in t he
sam e subnet as t he Rout er. See Appendix B on page 181.
Reset t he device t o it s fact ory default s, and t ry t o access t he Rout er wit h t he default I P address.
See Sect ion 3.3 on page 35.
I f t he problem cont inues, cont act t he net work adm inist rat or or vendor, or t ry one of t he advanced
suggest ions.
Adva n ce d Sugge st ion
• I f your com put er is connect ed t o t he W AN port or is connect ed wirelessly, use a com put er t hat is
connect ed t o a LAN / ETH ERN ET port .
I can see t he Login screen, but I cannot log in t o t he Rout er.
Make sure you have ent ered t he password correct ly. The default password is 1 2 3 4 . This field is
case- sensit ive, so m ake sure [ Caps Lock] is not on.
This can happen when you fail t o log out properly from your last session. Try logging in again aft er
5 m inut es.
Disconnect and re- connect t he power adapt or or cord t o t he Rout er.
I f t his does not work, you have t o reset t he device t o it s fact ory default s. See Sect ion 23.4 on page
169.
23.3 Internet Access
I cannot access t he I nt er net .
Check t he hardware connect ions, and m ake sure t he LEDs are behaving as expect ed. See t he Quick
St art Guide.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
167
Chapter 23 Troubleshooting
Make sure you ent ered your I SP account inform at ion correct ly in t he wizard. These fields are casesensit ive, so m ake sure [ Caps Lock] is not on.
I f you are t rying t o access t he I nt ernet wirelessly, m ake sure t he wireless set t ings in t he wireless
client are t he sam e as t he set t ings in t he AP.
• Go t o N e t w or k > W ir e le ss LAN 2 .4 G > Ge ne r a l > W D S and check if t he Rout er is set t o
bridge m ode. Select D isa ble and t ry t o connect t o t he I nt ernet again.
Disconnect all t he cables from your device, and follow t he direct ions in t he Quick St art Guide again.
Go t o M a int e n a n ce > Sys OP M ode . Check your Syst em Operat ion Mode set t ing.
• Select Rout e r if your device rout es t raffic bet ween a local net work and anot her net work such
as t he I nt ernet .
• Select Acce ss Point if your device bridges t raffic bet ween client s on t he sam e net work.
I f t he problem cont inues, cont act your I SP.
I cannot access t he I nt ernet anym ore. I had access t o t he I nt ernet ( wit h t he Rout er) , but m y
I nt ernet connect ion is not available anym ore.
Check t he hardware connect ions, and m ake sure t he LEDs are behaving as expect ed. See t he Quick
St art Guide and Sect ion 1.5 on page 17.
Reboot t he Rout er.
I f t he problem cont inues, cont act your I SP.
The I nt ernet connect ion is slow or int erm it t ent .
There m ight be a lot of t raffic on t he net work. Look at t he LEDs, and check Sect ion 1.5 on page 17.
I f t he Rout er is sending or receiving a lot of inform at ion, t ry closing som e program s t hat use t he
I nt ernet , especially peer- t o- peer applicat ions.
Check t he signal st rengt h. I f t he signal st rengt h is low, t ry m oving t he Rout er closer t o t he AP if
possible, and look around t o see if t here are any devices t hat m ight be int erfering wit h t he wireless
net work ( for exam ple, m icrowaves, ot her wireless net works, and so on) .
Reboot t he Rout er.
I f t he problem cont inues, cont act t he net work adm inist rat or or vendor, or t ry one of t he advanced
suggest ions.
Adva n ce d Sugge st ions
• Check t he set t ings for bandwidt h m anagem ent . I f it is disabled, you m ight consider act ivat ing it .
I f it is enabled, you m ight consider changing t he allocat ions.
168
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Chapter 23 Troubleshooting
• Check t he set t ings for QoS. I f it is disabled, you m ight consider act ivat ing it . I f it is enabled, you
m ight consider raising or lowering t he priorit y for som e applicat ions.
I set up URL keyword blocking, but I can st ill access a websit e t hat should be blocked.
Make sure t hat you select t he En a ble URL Ke yw or d Block in g check box in t he Cont ent Filt ering
screen. Make sure t hat t he keywords t hat you t ype are list ed in t he Ke yw or d List .
I f a keyword t hat is list ed in t he Ke yw or d List is not blocked when it is found in a URL, cust om ize
t he keyword blocking using com m ands. See t he Cust om izing Keyword Blocking URL Checking
sect ion in t he Cont ent Filt er chapt er.
23.4 Resetting the Router to Its Factory Defaults
I f you reset t he Rout er, you lose all of t he changes you have m ade. The Rout er re- loads it s default
set t ings, and t he password reset s t o 1 2 3 4 . You have t o m ake all of your changes again.
You will lose all of your changes when you push t he RESET but t on.
To reset t he Rout er,
Make sure t he power LED is on.
Press t he RESET but t on for longer t han 1 second t o rest art / reboot t he Rout er.
Press t he RESET but t on for longer t han five seconds t o set t he Rout er back t o it s fact ory- default
configurat ions.
I f t he Rout er rest art s aut om at ically, wait for t he Rout er t o finish rest art ing, and log in t o t he Web
Configurat or. The password is “ 1234”.
I f t he Rout er does not rest art aut om at ically, disconnect and reconnect t he Rout er’s power. Then,
follow t he direct ions above again.
23.5 Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting
I cannot access t he Rout er or ping any com put er from t he WLAN ( wireless AP or rout er) .
Make sure t he wireless LAN is enabled on t he Rout er
NBG6503 User’s Guide
169
Chapter 23 Troubleshooting
Make sure t he wireless adapt er on t he wireless st at ion is working properly.
Make sure t he wireless adapt er inst alled on your com put er is I EEE 802.11 com pat ible and support s
t he sam e wireless st andard as t he Rout er.
Make sure your com put er ( wit h a wireless adapt er inst alled) is wit hin t he t ransm ission range of t he
Rout er.
Check t hat bot h t he Rout er and your wireless st at ion are using t he sam e wireless and wireless
securit y set t ings.
Make sure t raffic bet ween t he WLAN and t he LAN is not blocked by t he firewall on t he Rout er.
Make sure you allow t he Rout er t o be rem ot ely accessed t hrough t he WLAN int erface. Check your
rem ot e m anagem ent set t ings.
• See t he chapt er on Wireless LAN in t he User ’s Guide for m ore inform at ion.
I cannot access t he Web Configurat or aft er I sw it ched t o AP m ode.
192.168.1.1 is the default I P in Router mode (the default mode). I n AP mode the default I P is
192.168.1.2. So, when you switch from Router mode to AP mode, you need to use the AP mode I P to
log in.
My 5G net work doesn’t work.
Check t he labels on t he ant ennas and connect ors, m ake sure t he correct ant ennas are connect ed t o
t he corresponding connect ors.
Connect t he 2 .4 G / 5 G ant enna t o t he 2 .4 G / 5 G connect or and t he 2 .4 G ant enna t o t he 2 .4 G
connect or.
• See t he Quick St art Guide for det ails.
170
NBG6503 User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
IP Addresses and Subnetting
This appendix int roduces I P addresses and subnet m asks.
I P addresses ident ify individual devices on a net work. Every net working device ( including
com put ers, servers, rout ers, print ers, et c.) needs an I P address t o com m unicat e across t he
net work. These net working devices are also known as host s.
Subnet m asks det erm ine t he m axim um num ber of possible host s on a net work. You can also use
subnet m asks t o divide one net work int o m ult iple sub- net works.
Introduction to IP Addresses
One part of t he I P address is t he net work num ber, and t he ot her part is t he host I D. I n t he sam e
way t hat houses on a st reet share a com m on st reet nam e, t he host s on a net work share a com m on
net work num ber. Sim ilarly, as each house has it s own house num ber, each host on t he net work has
it s own unique ident ifying num ber - t he host I D. Rout ers use t he net work num ber t o send packet s
t o t he correct net work, while t he host I D det erm ines t o which host on t he net work t he packet s are
delivered.
Structure
An I P address is m ade up of four part s, writ t en in dot t ed decim al not at ion ( for exam ple,
192.168.1.1) . Each of t hese four part s is known as an oct et . An oct et is an eight- digit binary
num ber ( for exam ple 11000000, which is 192 in decim al not at ion) .
Therefore, each oct et has a possible range of 00000000 t o 11111111 in binary, or 0 t o 255 in
decim al.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
171
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
The following figure shows an exam ple I P address in which t he first t hree oct et s ( 192.168.1) are
t he net work num ber, and t he fourt h oct et ( 16) is t he host I D.
Figure 122 Net work Num ber and Host I D
How m uch of t he I P address is t he net work num ber and how m uch is t he host I D varies according
t o t he subnet m ask.
Subnet Masks
A subnet m ask is used t o det erm ine which bit s are part of t he net work num ber, and which bit s are
part of t he host I D ( using a logical AND operat ion) . The t erm “ subnet ” is short for “ sub- net work”.
A subnet m ask has 32 bit s. I f a bit in t he subnet m ask is a “ 1” t hen t he corresponding bit in t he I P
address is part of t he net work num ber. I f a bit in t he subnet m ask is “ 0” t hen t he corresponding bit
in t he I P address is part of t he host I D.
The following exam ple shows a subnet m ask ident ifying t he net work num ber ( in bold t ext ) and host
I D of an I P address ( 192.168.1.2 in decim al) .
Table 71 I P Address Net work Num ber and Host I D Exam ple
1ST OCTET: 2ND
OCTET:
(192)
(168)
3RD
OCTET:
4TH OCTET
(1)
(2)
I P Address ( Binary)
11000000
10101000
00000001
00000010
Subnet Mask ( Binary)
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
Net work Num ber
11000000
10101000
00000001
Host I D
00000010
By convent ion, subnet m asks always consist of a cont inuous sequence of ones beginning from t he
left m ost bit of t he m ask, followed by a cont inuous sequence of zeros, for a t ot al num ber of 32 bit s.
Subnet m asks can be referred t o by t he size of t he net work num ber part ( t he bit s wit h a “ 1” value) .
For exam ple, an “ 8- bit m ask” m eans t hat t he first 8 bit s of t he m ask are ones and t he rem aining 24
bit s are zeroes.
172
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
Subnet m asks are expressed in dot t ed decim al not at ion j ust like I P addresses. The following
exam ples show t he binary and decim al not at ion for 8- bit , 16- bit , 24- bit and 29- bit subnet m asks.
Table 72 Subnet Masks
BINARY
DECIMAL
1ST
OCTET
2ND
OCTET
3RD
OCTET
4TH OCTET
8- bit m ask
11111111
00000000
00000000
00000000
255.0.0.0
16- bit m ask
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
255.255.0.0
24- bit m ask
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
255.255.255.0
29- bit m ask
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111000
255.255.255.248
Network Size
The size of t he net work num ber det erm ines t he m axim um num ber of possible host s you can have
on your net work. The larger t he num ber of net work num ber bit s, t he sm aller t he num ber of
rem aining host I D bit s.
An I P address wit h host I Ds of all zeros is t he I P address of t he net work ( 192.168.1.0 wit h a 24- bit
subnet m ask, for exam ple) . An I P address wit h host I Ds of all ones is t he broadcast address for t hat
net work ( 192.168.1.255 wit h a 24- bit subnet m ask, for exam ple) .
As t hese t wo I P addresses cannot be used for individual host s, calculat e t he m axim um num ber of
possible host s in a net work as follows:
Table 73 Maxim um Host Num bers
SUBNET MASK
HOST ID SIZE
8 bit s
24 bit s
16 bit s
255.0.0.0
255.255.0.0
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF
HOSTS
2 24 – 2
16 bit s
16
16777214
– 2
65534
24 bit s
255.255.255.0
8 bit s
2 – 2
254
29 bit s
255.255.255.248
3 bit s
23 – 2
Notation
Since t he m ask is always a cont inuous num ber of ones beginning from t he left , followed by a
cont inuous num ber of zeros for t he rem ainder of t he 32 bit m ask, you can sim ply specify t he
num ber of ones inst ead of writ ing t he value of each oct et . This is usually specified by writ ing a “ / ”
followed by t he num ber of bit s in t he m ask aft er t he address.
For exam ple, 192.1.1.0 / 25 is equivalent t o saying 192.1.1.0 wit h subnet m ask 255.255.255.128.
The following t able shows som e possible subnet m asks using bot h not at ions.
Table 74 Alt ernat ive Subnet Mask Not at ion
SUBNET MASK
ALTERNATIVE
NOTATION
LAST OCTET
(BINARY)
LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL)
255.255.255.0
/ 24
0000 0000
255.255.255.128
/ 25
1000 0000
128
255.255.255.192
/ 26
1100 0000
192
NBG6503 User’s Guide
173
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
Table 74 Alt ernat ive Subnet Mask Not at ion ( cont inued)
SUBNET MASK
ALTERNATIVE
NOTATION
LAST OCTET
(BINARY)
LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL)
255.255.255.224
/ 27
1110 0000
224
255.255.255.240
/ 28
1111 0000
240
255.255.255.248
/ 29
1111 1000
248
255.255.255.252
/ 30
1111 1100
252
Subnetting
You can use subnet t ing t o divide one net work int o m ult iple sub- net works. I n t he following exam ple
a net work adm inist rat or creat es t wo sub- net works t o isolat e a group of servers from t he rest of t he
com pany net work for securit y reasons.
I n t his exam ple, t he com pany net work address is 192.168.1.0. The first t hree oct et s of t he address
( 192.168.1) are t he net work num ber, and t he rem aining oct et is t he host I D, allowing a m axim um
of 2 8 – 2 or 254 possible host s.
The following figure shows t he com pany net work before subnet t ing.
Figure 123 Subnet t ing Exam ple: Before Subnet t ing
You can “ borrow” one of t he host I D bit s t o divide t he net work 192.168.1.0 int o t wo separat e subnet works. The subnet m ask is now 25 bit s ( 255.255.255.128 or / 25) .
The “ borrowed” host I D bit can have a value of eit her 0 or 1, allowing t wo subnet s; 192.168.1.0 / 25
and 192.168.1.128 / 25.
174
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
The following figure shows t he com pany net work aft er subnet t ing. There are now t wo subnet works, A and B.
Figure 124 Subnet t ing Exam ple: Aft er Subnet t ing
I n a 25- bit subnet t he host I D has 7 bit s, so each sub- net work has a m axim um of 2 7 – 2 or 126
possible host s ( a host I D of all zeroes is t he subnet ’s address it self, all ones is t he subnet ’s
broadcast address) .
192.168.1.0 wit h m ask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A it self, and 192.168.1.127 wit h m ask
255.255.255.128 is it s broadcast address. Therefore, t he lowest I P address t hat can be assigned t o
an act ual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and t he highest is 192.168.1.126.
Sim ilarly, t he host I D range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 t o 192.168.1.254.
Example: Four Subnets
The previous exam ple illust rat ed using a 25- bit subnet m ask t o divide a 24- bit address int o t wo
subnet s. Sim ilarly, t o divide a 24- bit address int o four subnet s, you need t o “ borrow” t wo host I D
bit s t o give four possible com binat ions ( 00, 01, 10 and 11) . The subnet m ask is 26 bit s
( 11111111.11111111.11111111.1 1 000000) or 255.255.255.192.
Each subnet cont ains 6 host I D bit s, giving 2 6 - 2 or 62 host s for each subnet ( a host I D of all
zeroes is t he subnet it self, all ones is t he subnet ’s broadcast address) .
Table 75 Subnet 1
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
I P Address ( Decim al)
192.168.1.
I P Address ( Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
0 0 000000
Subnet Mask ( Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
1 1 000000
NBG6503 User’s Guide
175
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
Table 75 Subnet 1 ( cont inued)
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.0
Lowest Host I D: 192.168.1.1
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.63
Highest Host I D: 192.168.1.62
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
Table 76 Subnet 2
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
I P Address
192.168.1.
64
I P Address ( Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
0 1 000000
Subnet Mask ( Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
1 1 000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.64
Lowest Host I D: 192.168.1.65
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.127
Highest Host I D: 192.168.1.126
Table 77 Subnet 3
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
I P Address
192.168.1.
128
I P Address ( Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
1 0 000000
Subnet Mask ( Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
1 1 000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128
Lowest Host I D: 192.168.1.129
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.191
Highest Host I D: 192.168.1.190
Table 78 Subnet 4
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
I P Address
192.168.1.
192
I P Address ( Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
1 1 000000
Subnet Mask ( Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
1 1 000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.192
Lowest Host I D: 192.168.1.193
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255
Highest Host I D: 192.168.1.254
Example: Eight Subnets
Sim ilarly, use a 27- bit m ask t o creat e eight subnet s ( 000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110 and 111) .
176
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
The following t able shows I P address last oct et values for each subnet .
Table 79 Eight Subnet s
SUBNET
SUBNET
ADDRESS
FIRST ADDRESS
LAST
ADDRESS
BROADCAST
ADDRESS
30
31
32
33
62
63
64
65
94
95
96
97
126
127
128
129
158
159
160
161
190
191
192
193
222
223
224
225
254
255
Subnet Planning
The following t able is a sum m ary for subnet planning on a net work wit h a 24- bit net work num ber.
Table 80 24- bit Net work Num ber Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
SUBNET MASK
NO. SUBNETS
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
255.255.255.128 ( / 25)
126
255.255.255.192 ( / 26)
62
255.255.255.224 ( / 27)
30
255.255.255.240 ( / 28)
16
14
255.255.255.248 ( / 29)
32
255.255.255.252 ( / 30)
64
255.255.255.254 ( / 31)
128
The following t able is a sum m ary for subnet planning on a net work wit h a 16- bit net work num ber.
Table 81 16- bit Net work Num ber Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
SUBNET MASK
NO. SUBNETS
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
255.255.128.0 ( / 17)
32766
255.255.192.0 ( / 18)
16382
255.255.224.0 ( / 19)
8190
255.255.240.0 ( / 20)
16
4094
255.255.248.0 ( / 21)
32
2046
255.255.252.0 ( / 22)
64
1022
255.255.254.0 ( / 23)
128
510
255.255.255.0 ( / 24)
256
254
255.255.255.128 ( / 25)
512
126
10
255.255.255.192 ( / 26)
1024
62
11
255.255.255.224 ( / 27)
2048
30
12
255.255.255.240 ( / 28)
4096
14
NBG6503 User’s Guide
177
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
Table 81 16- bit Net work Num ber Subnet Planning ( cont inued)
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
SUBNET MASK
NO. SUBNETS
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
13
255.255.255.248 ( / 29)
8192
14
255.255.255.252 ( / 30)
16384
15
255.255.255.254 ( / 31)
32768
Configuring IP Addresses
Where you obt ain your net work num ber depends on your part icular sit uat ion. I f t he I SP or your
net work adm inist rat or assigns you a block of regist ered I P addresses, follow t heir inst ruct ions in
select ing t he I P addresses and t he subnet m ask.
I f t he I SP did not explicit ly give you an I P net work num ber, t hen m ost likely you have a single user
account and t he I SP will assign you a dynam ic I P address when t he connect ion is est ablished. I f t his
is t he case, it is recom m ended t hat you select a net work num ber from 192.168.0.0 t o
192.168.255.0. The I nt ernet Assigned Num ber Aut horit y ( I ANA) reserved t his block of addresses
specifically for privat e use; please do not use any ot her num ber unless you are t old ot herwise. You
m ust also enable Net work Address Translat ion ( NAT) on t he Rout er.
Once you have decided on t he net work num ber, pick an I P address for your Rout er t hat is easy t o
rem em ber ( for inst ance, 192.168.1.1) but m ake sure t hat no ot her device on your net work is using
t hat I P address.
The subnet m ask specifies t he net work num ber port ion of an I P address. Your Rout er will com put e
t he subnet m ask aut om at ically based on t he I P address t hat you ent ered. You don't need t o change
t he subnet m ask com put ed by t he Rout er unless you are inst ruct ed t o do ot herwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every m achine on t he I nt ernet m ust have a unique address. I f your net works are isolat ed from t he
I nt ernet ( running only bet ween t wo branch offices, for exam ple) you can assign any I P addresses t o
t he host s wit hout problem s. However, t he I nt ernet Assigned Num bers Aut horit y ( I ANA) has
reserved t he following t hree blocks of I P addresses specifically for privat e net works:
• 10.0.0.0
• 172.16.0.0
— 10.255.255.255
— 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
You can obt ain your I P address from t he I ANA, from an I SP, or it can be assigned from a privat e
net work. I f you belong t o a sm all organizat ion and your I nt ernet access is t hrough an I SP, t he I SP
can provide you wit h t he I nt ernet addresses for your local net works. On t he ot her hand, if you are
part of a m uch larger organizat ion, you should consult your net work adm inist rat or for t he
appropriat e I P addresses.
Regardless of your part icular sit uat ion, do not creat e an arbit rary I P address; always follow t he
guidelines above. For m ore inform at ion on address assignm ent , please refer t o RFC 1597, Address
Allocat ion for Privat e I nt ernet s and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Managem ent of I P Address Space.
178
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
IP Address Conflicts
Each device on a net work m ust have a unique I P address. Devices wit h duplicat e I P addresses on
t he sam e net work will not be able t o access t he I nt ernet or ot her resources. The devices m ay also
be unreachable t hrough t he net work.
Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example
More t han one device can not use t he sam e I P address. I n t he following exam ple com put er A has a
st at ic ( or fixed) I P address t hat is t he sam e as t he I P address t hat a DHCP server assigns t o
com put er B which is a DHCP client . Neit her can access t he I nt ernet . This problem can be solved by
assigning a different st at ic I P address t o com put er A or set t ing com put er A t o obt ain an I P address
aut om at ically.
Figure 125 Conflict ing Com put er I P Addresses Exam ple
Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example
Since a rout er connect s different net works, it m ust have int erfaces using different net work
num bers. For exam ple, if a rout er is set bet ween a LAN and t he I nt ernet ( WAN) , t he rout er ’s LAN
and WAN addresses m ust be on different subnet s. I n t he following exam ple, t he LAN and WAN are
on t he sam e subnet . The LAN com put ers cannot access t he I nt ernet because t he rout er cannot
rout e bet ween net works.
Figure 126 Conflict ing Rout er I P Addresses Exam ple
NBG6503 User’s Guide
179
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example
More t han one device can not use t he sam e I P address. I n t he following exam ple, t he com put er and
t he rout er ’s LAN port bot h use 192.168.1.1 as t he I P address. The com put er cannot access t he
I nt ernet . This problem can be solved by assigning a different I P address t o t he com put er or t he
rout er ’s LAN port .
Figure 127 Conflict ing Com put er and Rout er I P Addresses Exam ple
180
NBG6503 User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Not e: Your specific Rout er m ay not support all of t he operat ing syst em s described in t his
appendix. See t he product specificat ions for m ore inform at ion about which
operat ing syst em s are support ed.
This appendix shows you how t o configure t he I P set t ings on your com put er in order for it t o be
able t o com m unicat e wit h t he ot her devices on your net work. Windows Vist a/ XP/ 2000, Mac OS 9/
OS X, and all versions of UNI X/ LI NUX include t he soft ware com ponent s you need t o use TCP/ I P on
your com put er.
I f you m anually assign I P inform at ion inst ead of using a dynam ic I P, m ake sure t hat your net work’s
com put ers have I P addresses t hat place t hem in t he sam e subnet .
I n t his appendix, you can set up an I P address for:
• Windows XP/ NT/ 2000 on page 182
• Windows Vist a on page 185
• Windows 7 on page 189
• Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4 on page 193
• Mac OS X: 10.5 and 10.6 on page 196
• Linux: Ubunt u 8 ( GNOME) on page 199
• Linux: openSUSE 10.3 ( KDE) on page 203
NBG6503 User’s Guide
181
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Windows XP/NT/2000
The following exam ple uses t he default Windows XP display t hem e but can also apply t o Windows
2000 and Windows NT.
182
Click St a r t > Con t r ol Pa n e l.
I n t he Cont r ol Pa n e l, click t he N e t w or k Con ne ct ion s icon.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Right- click Loca l Ar e a Conne ct ion and t hen select Pr ope r t ie s.
On t he Ge n e r a l t ab, select I n t e r n e t Pr ot ocol ( TCP/ I P) and t hen click Pr ope r t ie s.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
183
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
The I nt e r ne t Pr ot ocol TCP/ I P Pr ope r t ie s window opens.
Select Obt a in a n I P a ddr e ss a ut om a t ica lly if your net work adm inist rat or or I SP assigns your I P
address dynam ically.
Select Use t h e follow in g I P Addr e ss and fill in t he I P a ddr e ss, Subn e t m a sk , and D e fa ult
ga t e w a y fields if you have a st at ic I P address t hat was assigned t o you by your net work
adm inist rat or or I SP. You m ay also have t o ent er a Pr e fe r r e d D N S se r ve r and an Alt e r na t e D N S
se r ve r , if t hat inform at ion was provided.
Click OK t o close t he I n t e r ne t Pr ot ocol ( TCP/ I P) Pr ope r t ie s window.
Click OK t o close t he Loca l Ar e a Con n e ct ion Pr ope r t ie s window.
Verifying Settings
Click St a r t > All Pr ogr a m s > Acce ssor ie s > Com m a nd Pr om pt .
I n t he Com m a nd Pr om pt window, t ype " ipconfig" and t hen press [ ENTER] .
You can also go t o St a r t > Con t r ol Pa n e l > N e t w or k Con n e ct ions, right- click a net work
connect ion, click St a t u s and t hen click t he Suppor t t ab t o view your I P address and connect ion
inform at ion.
184
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Windows Vista
This sect ion shows screens from Windows Vist a Professional.
Click St a r t > Cont r ol Pa n e l.
I n t he Cont r ol Pa n e l, click t he N e t w or k a nd I n t e r n e t icon.
Click t he N e t w or k a n d Sh a r ing Ce n t e r icon.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
185
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Click M a n a ge n e t w or k con n e ct ions.
Right- click Loca l Ar e a Conne ct ion and t hen select Pr ope r t ie s.
Not e: During t his procedure, click Con t inu e whenever Windows displays a screen saying
t hat it needs your perm ission t o cont inue.
186
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Select I n t e r n e t Pr ot ocol Ve r sion 4 ( TCP/ I Pv4 ) and t hen select Pr ope r t ie s.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
187
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
The I nt e r ne t Pr ot ocol Ve r sion 4 ( TCP/ I Pv4 ) Pr ope r t ie s window opens.
Select Obt a in a n I P a ddr e ss a ut om a t ica lly if your net work adm inist rat or or I SP assigns your I P
address dynam ically.
Select Use t h e follow in g I P Addr e ss and fill in t he I P a ddr e ss, Subn e t m a sk , and D e fa ult
ga t e w a y fields if you have a st at ic I P address t hat was assigned t o you by your net work
adm inist rat or or I SP. You m ay also have t o ent er a Pr e fe r r e d D N S se r ve r and an Alt e r na t e D N S
se r ve r , if t hat inform at ion was provided.Click Adva nce d.
Click OK t o close t he I n t e r ne t Pr ot ocol ( TCP/ I P) Pr ope r t ie s window.
10 Click OK t o close t he Loca l Ar e a Con n e ct ion Pr ope r t ie s window.
Verifying Settings
Click St a r t > All Pr ogr a m s > Acce ssor ie s > Com m a nd Pr om pt .
I n t he Com m a nd Pr om pt window, t ype " ipconfig" and t hen press [ ENTER] .
You can also go t o St a r t > Con t r ol Pa n e l > N e t w or k Con n e ct ions, right- click a net work
connect ion, click St a t u s and t hen click t he Suppor t t ab t o view your I P address and connect ion
inform at ion.
188
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Windows 7
This sect ion shows screens from Windows 7 Ent erprise.
Click St a r t > Cont r ol Pa n e l.
I n t he Cont r ol Pa n e l, click Vie w ne t w or k st a t us a nd t a sk s under t he N e t w or k a n d I n t e r n e t
cat egory.
Click Ch a n ge a da pt e r se t t in gs.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
189
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Double click Loca l Ar e a Conne ct ion and t hen select Pr ope r t ie s.
Not e: During t his procedure, click Con t inu e whenever Windows displays a screen saying
t hat it needs your perm ission t o cont inue.
190
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Select I n t e r n e t Pr ot ocol Ve r sion 4 ( TCP/ I Pv4 ) and t hen select Pr ope r t ie s.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
191
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
The I nt e r ne t Pr ot ocol Ve r sion 4 ( TCP/ I Pv4 ) Pr ope r t ie s window opens.
Select Obt a in a n I P a ddr e ss a ut om a t ica lly if your net work adm inist rat or or I SP assigns your I P
address dynam ically.
Select Use t h e follow in g I P Addr e ss and fill in t he I P a ddr e ss, Subn e t m a sk , and D e fa ult
ga t e w a y fields if you have a st at ic I P address t hat was assigned t o you by your net work
adm inist rat or or I SP. You m ay also have t o ent er a Pr e fe r r e d D N S se r ve r and an Alt e r na t e D N S
se r ve r , if t hat inform at ion was provided. Click Adva nce d if you want t o configure advanced
set t ings for I P, DNS and WI NS.
192
Click OK t o close t he I n t e r ne t Pr ot ocol ( TCP/ I P) Pr ope r t ie s window.
Click OK t o close t he Loca l Ar e a Con n e ct ion Pr ope r t ie s window.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Verifying Settings
Click St a r t > All Pr ogr a m s > Acce ssor ie s > Com m a nd Pr om pt .
I n t he Com m a nd Pr om pt window, t ype " ipconfig" and t hen press [ ENTER] .
The I P set t ings are displayed as follows.
Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4
The screens in t his sect ion are from Mac OS X 10.4 but can also apply t o 10.3.
Click Apple > Syst e m Pr e fe r e nce s.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
193
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
194
I n t he Syst e m Pr e fe r e nce s window, click t he N e t w or k icon.
When t he N e t w or k preferences pane opens, select Built - in Et he r ne t from t he net work
connect ion t ype list , and t hen click Configu r e .
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
For dynam ically assigned set t ings, select Usin g D H CP from t he Configu r e I Pv4 list in t he TCP/ I P
t ab.
For st at ically assigned set t ings, do t he following:
• From t he Configu r e I Pv4 list , select M a nua lly.
• I n t he I P Addr e ss field, t ype your I P address.
• I n t he Subn e t M a sk field, t ype your subnet m ask.
• I n t he Rou t e r field, t ype t he I P address of your device.
Click Apply N ow and close t he window.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
195
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/ I P propert ies by clicking Applica t ions > Ut ilit ie s > N e t w or k Ut ilit ie s, and t hen
select ing t he appropriat e N e t w or k I nt e r fa ce from t he I n fo t ab.
Figure 128 Mac OS X 10.4: Net work Ut ilit y
Mac OS X: 10.5 and 10.6
The screens in t his sect ion are from Mac OS X 10.5 but can also apply t o 10.6.
196
Click Apple > Syst e m Pr e fe r e nce s.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
I n Syst e m Pr e fe r e n ce s, click t he N e t w or k icon.
When t he N e t w or k preferences pane opens, select Et he r ne t from t he list of available connect ion
t ypes.
From t he Configu r e list , select Usin g D H CP for dynam ically assigned set t ings.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
197
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
For st at ically assigned set t ings, do t he following:
• From t he Configu r e list , select M a nua lly.
• I n t he I P Addr e ss field, ent er your I P address.
• I n t he Subn e t M a sk field, ent er your subnet m ask.
• I n t he Rou t e r field, ent er t he I P address of your Rout er.
198
Click Apply and close t he window.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/ I P propert ies by clicking Applica t ions > Ut ilit ie s > N e t w or k Ut ilit ie s, and t hen
select ing t he appropriat e N e t w or k int e r fa ce from t he I nfo t ab.
Figure 129 Mac OS X 10.5: Net work Ut ilit y
Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME)
This sect ion shows you how t o configure your com put er ’s TCP/ I P set t ings in t he GNU Obj ect Model
Environm ent ( GNOME) using t he Ubunt u 8 Linux dist ribut ion. The procedure, screens and file
locat ions m ay vary depending on your specific dist ribut ion, release version, and individual
configurat ion. The following screens use t he default Ubunt u 8 inst allat ion.
Not e: Make sur e you are logged in as t he root adm inist rat or.
Follow t he st eps below t o configure your com put er I P address in GNOME:
Click Syst e m > Adm in ist r a t ion > N e t w or k .
NBG6503 User’s Guide
199
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
200
When t he N e t w or k Se t t in gs window opens, click Un lock t o open t he Aut he nt ica t e window. ( By
default , t he Unlock but t on is greyed out unt il clicked.) You cannot m ake changes t o your
configurat ion unless you first ent er your adm in password.
I n t he Aut he nt ica t e window, ent er your adm in account nam e and password t hen click t he
Aut he nt ica t e but t on.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
I n t he N e t w or k Se t t ings window, select t he connect ion t hat you want t o configure, t hen click
Pr ope r t ie s.
The Pr ope r t ie s dialog box opens.
• I n t he Configu r a t ion list , select Au t om a t ic Con figu r a t ion ( D H CP) if you have a dynam ic I P
address.
• I n t he Configur a t ion list , select St a t ic I P a ddr e ss if you have a st at ic I P address. Fill in t he
I P a ddr e ss, Subne t m a sk , and Ga t e w a y a ddr e ss fields.
Click OK t o save t he changes and close t he Pr ope r t ie s dialog box and ret urn t o t he N e t w or k
Se t t in gs screen.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
201
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
202
I f you know your DNS server I P address( es) , click t he D N S t ab in t he N e t w or k Se t t in gs window
and t hen ent er t he DNS server inform at ion in t he fields provided.
Click t he Close but t on t o apply t he changes.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/ I P propert ies by clicking Syst e m > Adm in ist r a t ion > N e t w or k Tools, and t hen
select ing t he appropriat e N e t w or k de vice from t he D e vice s t ab. The I n t e r fa ce St a t ist ics
colum n shows dat a if your connect ion is working properly.
Figure 130 Ubunt u 8: Net work Tools
Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE)
This sect ion shows you how t o configure your com put er ’s TCP/ I P set t ings in t he K Deskt op
Environm ent ( KDE) using t he openSUSE 10.3 Linux dist ribut ion. The procedure, screens and file
locat ions m ay vary depending on your specific dist ribut ion, release version, and individual
configurat ion. The following screens use t he default openSUSE 10.3 inst allat ion.
Not e: Make sur e you are logged in as t he root adm inist rat or.
Follow t he st eps below t o configure your com put er I P address in t he KDE:
NBG6503 User’s Guide
203
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
204
Click K M e n u > Com pu t e r > Adm in ist r a t or Se t t in gs ( Ya ST) .
When t he Run a s Root - KD E su dialog opens, ent er t he adm in password and click OK.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
When t he Ya ST Cont r ol Ce nt e r window opens, select N e t w or k D e vice s and t hen click t he
N e t w or k Ca r d icon.
When t he N e t w or k Se t t in gs window opens, click t he Ove r vie w t ab, select t he appropriat e
connect ion N a m e from t he list , and t hen click t he Configu r e but t on.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
205
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
When t he N e t w or k Ca r d Se t u p window opens, click t he Addr e ss t ab
Figure 131 openSUSE 10.3: Net work Card Set up
Select D yna m ic Addr e ss ( D H CP) if you have a dynam ic I P address.
Select St a t ica lly a ssign e d I P Addr e ss if you have a st at ic I P address. Fill in t he I P a ddr e ss,
Subne t m a sk , and H ost na m e fields.
206
Click N e x t t o save t he changes and close t he N e t w or k Ca r d Se t up window.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
I f you know your DNS server I P address( es) , click t he H ost na m e / D N S t ab in N e t w or k Se t t in gs
and t hen ent er t he DNS server inform at ion in t he fields provided.
Click Finish t o save your set t ings and close t he window.
Verifying Settings
Click t he KN e t w or k M a na ge r icon on t he Ta sk ba r t o check your TCP/ I P propert ies. From t he
Opt ion s sub- m enu, select Sh ow Con n e ct ion I n for m a t ion .
Figure 132 openSUSE 10.3: KNet work Manager
NBG6503 User’s Guide
207
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
When t he Conn e ct ion St a t u s - KN e t w or k M a n a ge r window opens, click t he St a t ist ics t a b t o
see if your connect ion is working properly.
Figure 133 openSUSE: Connect ion St at us - KNet work Manager
208
NBG6503 User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Wireless LANs
Wireless LAN Topologies
This sect ion discusses ad- hoc and infrast ruct ure wireless LAN t opologies.
Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration
The sim plest WLAN configurat ion is an independent ( Ad- hoc) WLAN t hat connect s a set of
com put ers wit h wireless adapt ers ( A, B, C) . Any t im e t wo or m ore wireless adapt ers are wit hin
range of each ot her, t hey can set up an independent net work, which is com m only referred t o as an
ad- hoc net work or I ndependent Basic Service Set ( I BSS) . The following diagram shows an exam ple
of not ebook com put ers using wireless adapt ers t o form an ad- hoc wireless LAN.
Figure 134 Peer- t o- Peer Com m unicat ion in an Ad- hoc Net work
BSS
A Basic Service Set ( BSS) exist s when all com m unicat ions bet ween wireless client s or bet ween a
wireless client and a wired net work client go t hrough one access point ( AP) .
I nt ra- BSS t raffic is t raffic bet ween wireless client s in t he BSS. When I nt ra- BSS is enabled, wireless
client A and B can access t he wired net work and com m unicat e wit h each ot her. When I nt ra- BSS is
NBG6503 User’s Guide
209
Appendix C Wireless LANs
disabled, wireless client A and B can st ill access t he wired net work but cannot com m unicat e wit h
each ot her.
Figure 135 Basic Service Set
ESS
An Ext ended Service Set ( ESS) consist s of a series of overlapping BSSs, each cont aining an access
point , wit h each access point connect ed t oget her by a wired net work. This wired connect ion
bet ween APs is called a Dist ribut ion Syst em ( DS) .
This t ype of wireless LAN t opology is called an I nfrast ruct ure WLAN. The Access Point s not only
provide com m unicat ion wit h t he wired net work but also m ediat e wireless net work t raffic in t he
im m ediat e neighborhood.
210
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix C Wireless LANs
An ESSI D ( ESS I Dent ificat ion) uniquely ident ifies each ESS. All access point s and t heir associat ed
wireless client s wit hin t he sam e ESS m ust have t he sam e ESSI D in order t o com m unicat e.
Figure 136 I nfrast ruct ure WLAN
Channel
A channel is t he radio frequency( ies) used by wireless devices t o t ransm it and receive dat a.
Channels available depend on your geographical area. You m ay have a choice of channels ( for your
region) so you should use a channel different from an adj acent AP ( access point ) t o reduce
int erference. I nt erference occurs when radio signals from different access point s overlap causing
int erference and degrading perform ance.
Adj acent channels part ially overlap however. To avoid int erference due t o overlap, your AP should
be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel t hat an adj acent AP is using. For
exam ple, if your region has 11 channels and an adj acent AP is using channel 1, t hen you need t o
select a channel bet ween 6 or 11.
RTS/CTS
A hidden node occurs when t wo st at ions are wit hin range of t he sam e access point , but are not
wit hin range of each ot her. The following figure illust rat es a hidden node. Bot h st at ions ( STA) are
wit hin range of t he access point ( AP) or wireless gat eway, but out- of- range of each ot her, so t hey
NBG6503 User’s Guide
211
Appendix C Wireless LANs
cannot " hear" each ot her, t hat is t hey do not know if t he channel is current ly being used. Therefore,
t hey are considered hidden from each ot her.
Figure 137
RTS/ CTS
When st at ion A sends dat a t o t he AP, it m ight not know t hat t he st at ion B is already using t he
channel. I f t hese t wo st at ions send dat a at t he sam e t im e, collisions m ay occur when bot h set s of
dat a arrive at t he AP at t he sam e t im e, result ing in a loss of m essages for bot h st at ions.
RTS/ CTS is designed t o prevent collisions due t o hidden nodes. An RTS/ CTS defines t he biggest
size dat a fram e you can send before an RTS ( Request To Send) / CTS ( Clear t o Send) handshake is
invoked.
When a dat a fram e exceeds t he RTS/ CTS value you set , t he st at ion t hat want s t o t ransm it t his
fram e m ust first send an RTS ( Request To Send) m essage t o t he AP for perm ission t o send it . The
AP t hen responds wit h a CTS ( Clear t o Send) m essage t o all ot her st at ions wit hin it s range t o not ify
t hem t o defer t heir t ransm ission. I t also reserves and confirm s wit h t he request ing st at ion t he t im e
fram e for t he request ed t ransm ission.
St at ions can send fram es sm aller t han t he specified RTS/ CTS direct ly t o t he AP wit hout t he RTS
( Request To Send) / CTS ( Clear t o Send) handshake.
You should only configure RTS/ CTS if t he possibilit y of hidden nodes exist s on your net work and
t he " cost " of resending large fram es is m ore t han t he ext ra net work overhead involved in t he RTS
( Request To Send) / CTS ( Clear t o Send) handshake.
I f t he RTS/ CTS value is great er t han t he Fr a gm e nt a t ion Thr e sh old value ( see next ) , t hen t he
RTS ( Request To Send) / CTS ( Clear t o Send) handshake will never occur as dat a fram es will be
fragm ent ed before t hey reach RTS/ CTS size.
Not e: Enabling t he RTS Threshold causes redundant net w ork overhead t hat could
negat ively affect t he t hroughput perfor m ance inst ead of pr oviding a rem edy.
Fragmentation Threshold
A Fr a gm e nt a t ion Thr e sh old is t he m axim um dat a fragm ent size t hat can be sent in t he wireless
net work before t he AP will fragm ent t he packet int o sm aller dat a fram es.
A large Fr a gm e n t a t ion Th r e sh old is recom m ended for net works not prone t o int erference while
you should set a sm aller t hreshold for busy net works or net works t hat are prone t o int erference.
212
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix C Wireless LANs
I f t he Fr a gm e nt a t ion Thr e shold value is sm aller t han t he RTS/ CTS value ( see previously) you
set t hen t he RTS ( Request To Send) / CTS ( Clear t o Send) handshake will never occur as dat a fram es
will be fragm ent ed before t hey reach RTS/ CTS size.
Preamble Type
Pream ble is used t o signal t hat dat a is com ing t o t he receiver. Short and long refer t o t he lengt h of
t he synchronizat ion field in a packet .
Short pream ble increases perform ance as less t im e sending pream ble m eans m ore t im e for sending
dat a. All I EEE 802.11 com pliant wireless adapt ers support long pream ble, but not all support short
pream ble.
Use long pream ble if you are unsure what pream ble m ode ot her wireless devices on t he net work
support , and t o provide m ore reliable com m unicat ions in busy wireless net works.
Use short pream ble if you are sure all wireless devices on t he net work support it , and t o provide
m ore efficient com m unicat ions.
Use t he dynam ic set t ing t o aut om at ically use short pream ble when all wireless devices on t he
net work support it , ot herwise t he Rout er uses long pream ble.
Not e: The wireless devices MUST use t he sam e pream ble m ode in order t o com m unicat e.
Wireless Security Overview
Wireless securit y is vit al t o your net work t o prot ect wireless com m unicat ion bet ween wireless
client s, access point s and t he wired net work.
Wireless securit y m et hods available on t he Rout er are dat a encrypt ion, wireless client
aut hent icat ion, rest rict ing access by device MAC address and hiding t he Rout er ident it y.
The following figure shows t he relat ive effect iveness of t hese wireless securit y m et hods available on
your Rout er.
Table 82 Wireless Securit y Levels
SECURITY
LEVEL
Least
Secure
SECURITY TYPE
Unique SSI D ( Default )
Unique SSI D wit h Hide SSI D Enabled
MAC Address Filt ering
WEP Encrypt ion
I EEE802.1x EAP wit h RADI US Server Aut hent icat ion
Wi- Fi Prot ect ed Access ( WPA)
WPA2
Most Secure
Not e: You m ust enable t he sam e wireless securit y set t ings on t he Rout er and on all
wireless client s t hat you want t o associat e wit h it .
NBG6503 User’s Guide
213
Appendix C Wireless LANs
IEEE 802.1x
I n June 2001, t he I EEE 802.1x st andard was designed t o ext end t he feat ures of I EEE 802.11 t o
support ext ended aut hent icat ion as well as providing addit ional account ing and cont rol feat ures. I t
is support ed by Windows XP and a num ber of net work devices. Som e advant ages of I EEE 802.1x
are:
• User based ident ificat ion t hat allows for roam ing.
• Support for RADI US ( Rem ot e Aut hent icat ion Dial I n User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for
cent ralized user profile and account ing m anagem ent on a net work RADI US server.
• Support for EAP ( Ext ensible Aut hent icat ion Prot ocol, RFC 2486) t hat allows addit ional
aut hent icat ion m et hods t o be deployed wit h no changes t o t he access point or t he wireless
client s.
RADIUS
RADI US is based on a client- server m odel t hat support s aut hent icat ion, aut horizat ion and
account ing. The access point is t he client and t he server is t he RADI US server. The RADI US server
handles t he following t asks:
• Aut hent icat ion
Det erm ines t he ident it y of t he users.
• Aut horizat ion
Det erm ines t he net work services available t o aut hent icat ed users once t hey are connect ed t o t he
net work.
• Account ing
Keeps t rack of t he client ’s net work act ivit y.
RADI US is a sim ple package exchange in which your AP act s as a m essage relay bet ween t he
wireless client and t he net work RADI US server.
Types of RADIUS Messages
The following t ypes of RADI US m essages are exchanged bet ween t he access point and t he RADI US
server for user aut hent icat ion:
• Access- Request
Sent by an access point request ing aut hent icat ion.
• Access- Rej ect
Sent by a RADI US server rej ect ing access.
• Access-Accept
Sent by a RADI US server allowing access.
• Access- Challenge
Sent by a RADI US server request ing m ore inform at ion in order t o allow access. The access point
sends a proper response from t he user and t hen sends anot her Access- Request m essage.
The following t ypes of RADI US m essages are exchanged bet ween t he access point and t he RADI US
server for user account ing:
214
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix C Wireless LANs
• Account ing- Request
Sent by t he access point request ing account ing.
• Account ing- Response
Sent by t he RADI US server t o indicat e t hat it has st art ed or st opped account ing.
I n order t o ensure net work securit y, t he access point and t he RADI US server use a shared secret
key, which is a password, t hey bot h know. The key is not sent over t he net work. I n addit ion t o t he
shared key, password inform at ion exchanged is also encrypt ed t o prot ect t he net work from
unaut horized access.
Types of EAP Authentication
This sect ion discusses som e popular aut hent icat ion t ypes: EAP- MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and
LEAP. Your wireless LAN device m ay not support all aut hent icat ion t ypes.
EAP ( Ext ensible Aut hent icat ion Prot ocol) is an aut hent icat ion prot ocol t hat runs on t op of t he I EEE
802.1x t ransport m echanism in order t o support m ult iple t ypes of user aut hent icat ion. By using EAP
t o int eract wit h an EAP- com pat ible RADI US server, an access point helps a wireless st at ion and a
RADI US server perform aut hent icat ion.
The t ype of aut hent icat ion you use depends on t he RADI US server and an int erm ediary AP( s) t hat
support s I EEE 802.1x. .
For EAP-TLS aut hent icat ion t ype, you m ust first have a wired connect ion t o t he net work and obt ain
t he cert ificat e( s) from a cert ificat e aut horit y ( CA) . A cert ificat e ( also called digit al I Ds) can be used
t o aut hent icat e users and a CA issues cert ificat es and guarant ees t he ident it y of each cert ificat e
owner.
EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5)
MD5 aut hent icat ion is t he sim plest one- way aut hent icat ion m et hod. The aut hent icat ion server
sends a challenge t o t he wireless client . The wireless client ‘proves’ t hat it knows t he password by
encrypt ing t he password wit h t he challenge and sends back t he inform at ion. Password is not sent in
plain t ext .
However, MD5 aut hent icat ion has som e weaknesses. Since t he aut hent icat ion server needs t o get
t he plaint ext passwords, t he passwords m ust be st ored. Thus som eone ot her t han t he
aut hent icat ion server m ay access t he password file. I n addit ion, it is possible t o im personat e an
aut hent icat ion server as MD5 aut hent icat ion m et hod does not perform m ut ual aut hent icat ion.
Finally, MD5 aut hent icat ion m et hod does not support dat a encrypt ion wit h dynam ic session key. You
m ust configure WEP encrypt ion keys for dat a encrypt ion.
EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security)
Wit h EAP-TLS, digit al cert ificat ions are needed by bot h t he server and t he wireless client s for
m ut ual aut hent icat ion. The server present s a cert ificat e t o t he client . Aft er validat ing t he ident it y of
t he server, t he client sends a different cert ificat e t o t he server. The exchange of cert ificat es is done
in t he open before a secured t unnel is creat ed. This m akes user ident it y vulnerable t o passive
at t acks. A digit al cert ificat e is an elect ronic I D card t hat aut hent icat es t he sender ’s ident it y.
However, t o im plem ent EAP-TLS, you need a Cert ificat e Aut horit y ( CA) t o handle cert ificat es, which
im poses a m anagem ent overhead.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
215
Appendix C Wireless LANs
EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service)
EAP-TTLS is an ext ension of t he EAP-TLS aut hent icat ion t hat uses cert ificat es for only t he serverside aut hent icat ions t o est ablish a secure connect ion. Client aut hent icat ion is t hen done by sending
usernam e and password t hrough t he secure connect ion, t hus client ident it y is prot ect ed. For client
aut hent icat ion, EAP-TTLS support s EAP m et hods and legacy aut hent icat ion m et hods such as PAP,
CHAP, MS- CHAP and MS- CHAP v2.
PEAP (Protected EAP)
Like EAP-TTLS, server- side cert ificat e aut hent icat ion is used t o est ablish a secure connect ion, t hen
use sim ple usernam e and password m et hods t hrough t he secured connect ion t o aut hent icat e t he
client s, t hus hiding client ident it y. However, PEAP only support s EAP m et hods, such as EAP- MD5,
EAP- MSCHAPv2 and EAP- GTC ( EAP- Generic Token Card) , for client aut hent icat ion. EAP- GTC is
im plem ent ed only by Cisco.
LEAP
LEAP ( Light weight Ext ensible Aut hent icat ion Prot ocol) is a Cisco im plem ent at ion of I EEE 802.1x.
Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
The AP m aps a unique key t hat is generat ed wit h t he RADI US server. This key expires when t he
wireless connect ion t im es out , disconnect s or reaut hent icat ion t im es out . A new WEP key is
generat ed each t im e reaut hent icat ion is perform ed.
I f t his feat ure is enabled, it is not necessary t o configure a default encrypt ion key in t he wireless
securit y configurat ion screen. You m ay st ill configure and st ore keys, but t hey will not be used while
dynam ic WEP is enabled.
Not e: EAP- MD5 cannot be used wit h Dynam ic WEP Key Exchange
For added securit y, cert ificat e- based aut hent icat ions ( EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynam ic
keys for dat a encrypt ion. They are oft en deployed in corporat e environm ent s, but for public
deploym ent , a sim ple user nam e and password pair is m ore pract ical. The following t able is a
com parison of t he feat ures of aut hent icat ion t ypes.
Table 83 Com parison of EAP Aut hent icat ion Types
216
EAP-MD5
EAP-TLS
EAP-TTLS
PEAP
LEAP
Mut ual Aut hent icat ion
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Cert ificat e – Client
No
Yes
Opt ional
Opt ional
No
Cert ificat e – Server
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Dynam ic Key Exchange
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Credent ial I nt egrit y
None
St rong
St rong
St rong
Moderat e
Deploym ent Difficult y
Easy
Hard
Moderat e
Moderat e
Moderat e
Client I dent it y Prot ect ion
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix C Wireless LANs
WPA and WPA2
Wi- Fi Prot ect ed Access ( WPA) is a subset of t he I EEE 802.11i st andard. WPA2 ( I EEE 802.11i) is a
wireless securit y st andard t hat defines st ronger encrypt ion, aut hent icat ion and key m anagem ent
t han WPA.
Key differences bet ween WPA or WPA2 and WEP are im proved dat a encrypt ion and user
aut hent icat ion.
I f bot h an AP and t he wireless client s support WPA2 and you have an ext ernal RADI US server, use
WPA2 for st ronger dat a encrypt ion. I f you don't have an ext ernal RADI US server, you should use
WPA2- PSK ( WPA2- Pre- Shared Key) t hat only requires a single ( ident ical) password ent ered int o
each access point , wireless gat eway and wireless client . As long as t he passwords m at ch, a wireless
client will be grant ed access t o a WLAN.
I f t he AP or t he wireless client s do not support WPA2, j ust use WPA or WPA- PSK depending on
whet her you have an ext ernal RADI US server or not .
Select WEP only when t he AP and/ or wireless client s do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less
secure t han WPA or WPA2.
Encryption
WPA im proves dat a encrypt ion by using Tem poral Key I nt egrit y Prot ocol ( TKI P) , Message I nt egrit y
Check ( MI C) and I EEE 802.1x. WPA2 also uses TKI P when required for com pat ibilit y reasons, but
offers st ronger encrypt ion t han TKI P wit h Advanced Encrypt ion St andard ( AES) in t he Count er
m ode wit h Cipher block chaining Message aut hent icat ion code Prot ocol ( CCMP) .
TKI P uses 128- bit keys t hat are dynam ically generat ed and dist ribut ed by t he aut hent icat ion server.
AES ( Advanced Encrypt ion St andard) is a block cipher t hat uses a 256- bit m at hem at ical algorit hm
called Rij ndael. They bot h include a per- packet key m ixing funct ion, a Message I nt egrit y Check
( MI C) nam ed Michael, an ext ended init ializat ion vect or ( I V) wit h sequencing rules, and a re- keying
m echanism .
WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rot at e t he encrypt ion keys so t hat t he sam e encrypt ion key is
never used t wice.
The RADI US server dist ribut es a Pairwise Mast er Key ( PMK) key t o t he AP t hat t hen set s up a key
hierarchy and m anagem ent syst em , using t he PMK t o dynam ically generat e unique dat a encrypt ion
keys t o encrypt every dat a packet t hat is wirelessly com m unicat ed bet ween t he AP and t he wireless
client s. This all happens in t he background aut om at ically.
The Message I nt egrit y Check ( MI C) is designed t o prevent an at t acker from capt uring dat a packet s,
alt ering t hem and resending t hem . The MI C provides a st rong m at hem at ical funct ion in which t he
receiver and t he t ransm it t er each com put e and t hen com pare t he MI C. I f t hey do not m at ch, it is
assum ed t hat t he dat a has been t am pered wit h and t he packet is dropped.
By generat ing unique dat a encrypt ion keys for every dat a packet and by creat ing an int egrit y
checking m echanism ( MI C) , wit h TKI P and AES it is m ore difficult t o decrypt dat a on a Wi- Fi
net work t han WEP and difficult for an int ruder t o break int o t he net work.
The encrypt ion m echanism s used for WPA( 2) and WPA( 2) - PSK are t he sam e. The only difference
bet ween t he t wo is t hat WPA( 2) - PSK uses a sim ple com m on password, inst ead of user- specific
credent ials. The com m on- password approach m akes WPA( 2) - PSK suscept ible t o brut e- force
NBG6503 User’s Guide
217
Appendix C Wireless LANs
password- guessing at t acks but it ’s st ill an im provem ent over WEP as it em ploys a consist ent ,
single, alphanum eric password t o derive a PMK which is used t o generat e unique t em poral
encrypt ion keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing t he sam e encrypt ion keys. ( a weakness of
WEP)
User Authentication
WPA and WPA2 apply I EEE 802.1x and Ext ensible Aut hent icat ion Prot ocol ( EAP) t o aut hent icat e
wireless client s using an ext ernal RADI US dat abase. WPA2 reduces t he num ber of key exchange
m essages from six t o four ( CCMP 4- way handshake) and short ens t he t im e required t o connect t o a
net work. Ot her WPA2 aut hent icat ion feat ures t hat are different from WPA include key caching and
pre- aut hent icat ion. These t wo feat ures are opt ional and m ay not be support ed in all wireless
devices.
Key caching allows a wireless client t o st ore t he PMK it derived t hrough a successful aut hent icat ion
wit h an AP. The wireless client uses t he PMK when it t ries t o connect t o t he sam e AP and does not
need t o go wit h t he aut hent icat ion process again.
Pre- aut hent icat ion enables fast roam ing by allowing t he wireless client ( already connect ing t o an
AP) t o perform I EEE 802.1x aut hent icat ion wit h anot her AP before connect ing t o it .
Wireless Client WPA Supplicants
A wireless client supplicant is t he soft ware t hat runs on an operat ing syst em inst ruct ing t he wireless
client how t o use WPA. At t he t im e of writ ing, t he m ost widely available supplicant is t he WPA pat ch
for Windows XP, Funk Soft ware's Odyssey client .
The Windows XP pat ch is a free download t hat adds WPA capabilit y t o Windows XP's built- in " Zero
Configurat ion" wireless client . However, you m ust run Windows XP t o use it .
WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
To set up WPA( 2) , you need t he I P address of t he RADI US server, it s port num ber ( default is 1812) ,
and t he RADI US shared secret . A WPA( 2) applicat ion exam ple wit h an ext ernal RADI US server
looks as follows. " A" is t he RADI US server. " DS" is t he dist ribut ion syst em .
218
The AP passes t he wireless client 's aut hent icat ion request t o t he RADI US server.
The RADI US server t hen checks t he user's ident ificat ion against it s dat abase and grant s or denies
net work access accordingly.
A 256- bit Pairwise Mast er Key ( PMK) is derived from t he aut hent icat ion process by t he RADI US
server and t he client .
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix C Wireless LANs
The RADI US server dist ribut es t he PMK t o t he AP. The AP t hen set s up a key hierarchy and
m anagem ent syst em , using t he PMK t o dynam ically generat e unique dat a encrypt ion keys. The
keys are used t o encrypt every dat a packet t hat is wirelessly com m unicat ed bet ween t he AP and
t he wireless client s.
Figure 138 WPA( 2) wit h RADI US Applicat ion Exam ple
WPA(2)-PSK Application Example
A WPA( 2) - PSK applicat ion looks as follows.
First ent er ident ical passwords int o t he AP and all wireless client s. The Pre- Shared Key ( PSK) m ust
consist of bet ween 8 and 63 ASCI I charact ers or 64 hexadecim al charact ers ( including spaces and
sym bols) .
The AP checks each wireless client 's password and allows it t o j oin t he net work only if t he password
m at ches.
The AP and wireless client s generat e a com m on PMK ( Pairwise Mast er Key) . The key it self is not
sent over t he net work, but is derived from t he PSK and t he SSI D.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
219
Appendix C Wireless LANs
The AP and wireless client s use t he TKI P or AES encrypt ion process, t he PMK and inform at ion
exchanged in a handshake t o creat e t em poral encrypt ion keys. They use t hese keys t o encrypt dat a
exchanged bet ween t hem .
Figure 139 WPA( 2) - PSK Aut hent icat ion
Security Parameters Summary
Refer t o t his t able t o see what ot her securit y param et ers you should configure for each
aut hent icat ion m et hod or key m anagem ent prot ocol t ype. MAC address filt ers are not dependent on
how you configure t hese securit y feat ures.
Table 84 Wireless Securit y Relat ional Mat rix
AUTHENTICATION
ENCRYPTIO
METHOD/ KEY
MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL N METHOD
ENTER
MANUAL KEY
IEEE 802.1X
Open
No
Disable
None
Enable wit hout Dynam ic WEP Key
Open
Shared
WEP
WEP
No
Enable wit h Dynam ic WEP Key
Yes
Enable wit hout Dynam ic WEP Key
Yes
Disable
No
Enable wit h Dynam ic WEP Key
Yes
Enable wit hout Dynam ic WEP Key
Yes
Disable
WPA
TKI P/ AES
No
Enable
WPA- PSK
TKI P/ AES
Yes
Disable
WPA2
TKI P/ AES
No
Enable
WPA2- PSK
TKI P/ AES
Yes
Disable
Antenna Overview
An ant enna couples RF signals ont o air. A t ransm it t er wit hin a wireless device sends an RF signal t o
t he ant enna, which propagat es t he signal t hrough t he air. The ant enna also operat es in reverse by
capt uring RF signals from t he air.
220
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix C Wireless LANs
Posit ioning t he ant ennas properly increases t he range and coverage area of a wireless LAN.
Antenna Characteristics
Frequency
An ant enna in t he frequency of 2.4GHz or 5GHz is needed t o com m unicat e efficient ly in a wireless
LAN
Radiation Pattern
A radiat ion pat t ern is a diagram t hat allows you t o visualize t he shape of t he ant enna’s coverage
area.
Antenna Gain
Ant enna gain, m easured in dB ( decibel) , is t he increase in coverage wit hin t he RF beam widt h.
Higher ant enna gain im proves t he range of t he signal for bet t er com m unicat ions.
For an indoor sit e, each 1 dB increase in ant enna gain result s in a range increase of approxim at ely
2.5% . For an unobst ruct ed out door sit e, each 1dB increase in gain result s in a range increase of
approxim at ely 5% . Act ual result s m ay vary depending on t he net work environm ent .
Ant enna gain is som et im es specified in dBi, which is how m uch t he ant enna increases t he signal
power com pared t o using an isot ropic ant enna. An isot ropic ant enna is a t heoret ical perfect ant enna
t hat sends out radio signals equally well in all direct ions. dBi represent s t he t rue gain t hat t he
ant enna provides.
Types of Antennas for WLAN
There are t wo t ypes of ant ennas used for wireless LAN applicat ions.
• Om ni- direct ional ant ennas send t he RF signal out in all direct ions on a horizont al plane. The
coverage area is t orus- shaped ( like a donut ) which m akes t hese ant ennas ideal for a room
environm ent . Wit h a wide coverage area, it is possible t o m ake circular overlapping coverage
areas wit h m ult iple access point s.
• Direct ional ant ennas concent rat e t he RF signal in a beam , like a flashlight does wit h t he light
from it s bulb. The angle of t he beam det erm ines t he widt h of t he coverage pat t ern. Angles
t ypically range from 20 degrees ( very direct ional) t o 120 degrees ( less direct ional) . Direct ional
ant ennas are ideal for hallways and out door point- t o- point applicat ions.
Positioning Antennas
I n general, ant ennas should be m ount ed as high as pract ically possible and free of obst ruct ions. I n
point- t o–point applicat ion, posit ion bot h ant ennas at t he sam e height and in a direct line of sight t o
each ot her t o at t ain t he best perform ance.
For om ni- direct ional ant ennas m ount ed on a t able, desk, and so on, point t he ant enna up. For
om ni- direct ional ant ennas m ount ed on a wall or ceiling, point t he ant enna down. For a single AP
applicat ion, place om ni- direct ional ant ennas as close t o t he cent er of t he coverage area as possible.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
221
Appendix C Wireless LANs
For direct ional ant ennas, point t he ant enna in t he direct ion of t he desired coverage area.
222
NBG6503 User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Common Services
The following t able list s som e com m only- used services and t heir associat ed prot ocols and port
num bers. For a com prehensive list of port num bers, I CMP t ype/ code num bers and services, visit
t he I ANA ( I nt ernet Assigned Num ber Aut horit y) web sit e.
• N a m e : This is a short , descript ive nam e for t he service. You can use t his one or creat e a
different one, if you like.
• Pr ot ocol: This is t he t ype of I P prot ocol used by t he service. I f t his is TCP/ UD P, t hen t he service
uses t he sam e port num ber wit h TCP and UDP. I f t his is USER- D EFI N ED, t he Por t ( s) is t he I P
prot ocol num ber, not t he port num ber.
• Por t ( s) : This value depends on t he Pr ot ocol. Please refer t o RFC 1700 for furt her inform at ion
about port num bers.
• I f t he Pr ot ocol is TCP, UD P, or TCP/ UD P, t his is t he I P port num ber.
• I f t he Pr ot ocol is USER, t his is t he I P prot ocol num ber.
• D e scr ipt ion : This is a brief explanat ion of t he applicat ions t hat use t his service or t he sit uat ions
in which t his service is used.
Table 85 Com m only Used Services
NAME
PROTOCOL
PORT(S)
DESCRIPTION
AH
( I PSEC_TUNNEL)
User- Defined
51
The I PSEC AH ( Aut hent icat ion Header)
t unneling prot ocol uses t his service.
AI M/ New- I CQ
TCP
5190
AOL’s I nt ernet Messenger service. I t is
also used as a list ening port by I CQ.
AUTH
TCP
113
Aut hent icat ion prot ocol used by som e
servers.
BGP
TCP
179
Border Gat eway Prot ocol.
BOOTP_CLI ENT
UDP
68
DHCP Client .
BOOTP_SERVER
UDP
67
DHCP Server.
CU- SEEME
TCP
7648
A popular videoconferencing solut ion from
Whit e Pines Soft ware.
UDP
24032
DNS
TCP/ UDP
53
Dom ain Nam e Server, a service t hat
m at ches web nam es ( for exam ple
www.zyxel.com ) t o I P num bers.
ESP
( I PSEC_TUNNEL)
User- Defined
50
The I PSEC ESP ( Encapsulat ion Securit y
Prot ocol) t unneling prot ocol uses t his
service.
FI NGER
TCP
79
Finger is a UNI X or I nt ernet relat ed
com m and t hat can be used t o find out if a
user is logged on.
FTP
TCP
20
TCP
21
File Transfer Program , a program t o enable
fast t ransfer of files, including large files
t hat m ay not be possible by e- m ail.
TCP
1720
Net Meet ing uses t his prot ocol.
H.323
NBG6503 User’s Guide
223
Appendix D Common Services
Table 85 Com m only Used Services ( cont inued)
224
NAME
PROTOCOL
PORT(S)
DESCRIPTION
HTTP
TCP
80
Hyper Text Transfer Prot ocol - a client /
server prot ocol for t he world wide web.
HTTPS
TCP
443
HTTPS is a secured ht t p session oft en used
in e- com m erce.
I CMP
User- Defined
I nt ernet Cont rol Message Prot ocol is oft en
used for diagnost ic or rout ing purposes.
I CQ
UDP
4000
This is a popular I nt ernet chat program .
I GMP ( MULTI CAST)
User- Defined
I nt ernet Group Managem ent Prot ocol is
used when sending packet s t o a specific
group of host s.
I KE
UDP
500
The I nt ernet Key Exchange algorit hm is
used for key dist ribut ion and
m anagem ent .
I RC
TCP/ UDP
6667
This is anot her popular I nt ernet chat
program .
MSN Messenger
TCP
1863
Microsoft Net works’ m essenger service
uses t his prot ocol.
NEW- I CQ
TCP
5190
An I nt ernet chat program .
NEWS
TCP
144
A prot ocol for news groups.
NFS
UDP
2049
Net work File Syst em - NFS is a client /
server dist ribut ed file service t hat provides
t ransparent file sharing for net work
environm ent s.
NNTP
TCP
119
Net work News Transport Prot ocol is t he
delivery m echanism for t he USENET
newsgroup service.
PI NG
User- Defined
Packet I Nt ernet Groper is a prot ocol t hat
sends out I CMP echo request s t o t est
whet her or not a rem ot e host is reachable.
POP3
TCP
110
Post Office Prot ocol version 3 let s a client
com put er get e- m ail from a POP3 server
t hrough a t em porary connect ion ( TCP/ I P
or ot her) .
PPTP
TCP
1723
Point- t o- Point Tunneling Prot ocol enables
secure t ransfer of dat a over public
net works. This is t he cont rol channel.
PPTP_TUNNEL
( GRE)
User- Defined
47
PPTP ( Point- t o- Point Tunneling Prot ocol)
enables secure t ransfer of dat a over public
net works. This is t he dat a channel.
RCMD
TCP
512
Rem ot e Com m and Service.
REAL_AUDI O
TCP
7070
A st ream ing audio service t hat enables
real t im e sound over t he web.
REXEC
TCP
514
Rem ot e Execut ion Daem on.
RLOGI N
TCP
513
Rem ot e Login.
RTELNET
TCP
107
Rem ot e Telnet .
RTSP
TCP/ UDP
554
The Real Tim e St ream ing ( m edia cont rol)
Prot ocol ( RTSP) is a rem ot e cont rol for
m ult im edia on t he I nt ernet .
SFTP
TCP
115
Sim ple File Transfer Prot ocol.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix D Common Services
Table 85 Com m only Used Services ( cont inued)
NAME
PROTOCOL
PORT(S)
DESCRIPTION
SMTP
TCP
25
Sim ple Mail Transfer Prot ocol is t he
m essage- exchange st andard for t he
I nt ernet . SMTP enables you t o m ove
m essages from one e- m ail server t o
anot her.
SNMP
TCP/ UDP
161
Sim ple Net work Managem ent Program .
SNMP-TRAPS
TCP/ UDP
162
Traps for use wit h t he SNMP ( RFC: 1215) .
SQL- NET
TCP
1521
St ruct ured Query Language is an int erface
t o access dat a on m any different t ypes of
dat abase syst em s, including m ainfram es,
m idrange syst em s, UNI X syst em s and
net work servers.
SSH
TCP/ UDP
22
Secure Shell Rem ot e Login Program .
STRM WORKS
UDP
1558
St ream Works Prot ocol.
SYSLOG
UDP
514
Syslog allows you t o send syst em logs t o a
UNI X server.
TACACS
UDP
49
Login Host Prot ocol used for ( Term inal
Access Cont roller Access Cont rol Syst em ) .
TELNET
TCP
23
Telnet is t he login and t erm inal em ulat ion
prot ocol com m on on t he I nt ernet and in
UNI X environm ent s. I t operat es over TCP/
I P net works. I t s prim ary funct ion is t o
allow users t o log int o rem ot e host
syst em s.
TFTP
UDP
69
Trivial File Transfer Prot ocol is an I nt ernet
file t ransfer prot ocol sim ilar t o FTP, but
uses t he UDP ( User Dat agram Prot ocol)
rat her t han TCP ( Transm ission Cont rol
Prot ocol) .
VDOLI VE
TCP
7000
Anot her videoconferencing solut ion.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
225
A PPENDIX
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2013 by ZyXEL Com m unicat ions Corporat ion.
The cont ent s of t his publicat ion m ay not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, t ranscribed,
st ored in a ret rieval syst em , t ranslat ed int o any language, or t ransm it t ed in any form or by any
m eans, elect ronic, m echanical, m agnet ic, opt ical, chem ical, phot ocopying, m anual, or ot herwise,
wit hout t he prior writ t en perm ission of ZyXEL Com m unicat ions Corporat ion.
Published by ZyXEL Com m unicat ions Corporat ion. All right s reserved.
Disclaimer
ZyXEL does not assum e any liabilit y arising out of t he applicat ion or use of any product s, or soft ware described her ein. Neit her does it
convey any license under it s pat ent right s nor t he pat ent right s of ot hers. ZyXEL furt her reserves t he right t o m ake changes in any
product s described herein wit hout not ice. This publicat ion is subj ect t o change w it hout not ice.
Certifications
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement
The device com plies wit h Part 15 of FCC rules. Operat ion is subj ect t o t he following t wo condit ions:
• This device m ay not cause harm ful int erference.
• This device m ust accept any int erference received, including int erference t hat m ay cause
undesired operat ions.
This device has been t est ed and found t o com ply wit h t he lim it s for a Class B digit al device pursuant
t o Part 15 of t he FCC Rules. These lim it s are designed t o provide reasonable prot ect ion against
harm ful int erference in a resident ial inst allat ion. This device generat es, uses, and can radiat e radio
frequency energy, and if not inst alled and used in accordance wit h t he inst ruct ions, m ay cause
harm ful int erference t o radio com m unicat ions. However, t here is no guarant ee t hat int erference will
not occur in a part icular inst allat ion.
I f t his device does cause harm ful int erference t o radio/ t elevision recept ion, which can be
det erm ined by t urning t he device off and on, t he user is encouraged t o t ry t o correct t he
int erference by one or m ore of t he following m easures:
Reorient or relocat e t he receiving ant enna.
I ncrease t he separat ion bet ween t he equipm ent and t he receiver.
Connect t he equipm ent int o an out let on a circuit different from t hat t o which t he receiver is
connect ed.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
227
Appendix E Legal Information
Consult t he dealer or an experienced radio/ TV t echnician for help.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
• This t ransm it t er m ust not be co- locat ed or operat ing in conj unct ion wit h any ot her ant enna or
t ransm it t er.
• I EEE 802.11b or 802.11g operat ion of t his product in t he U.S.A. is firm ware- lim it ed t o channels 1
t hrough 11.
• To com ply wit h FCC RF exposure com pliance requirem ent s, a separat ion dist ance of at least 20
cm m ust be m aint ained bet ween t he ant enna of t his device and all persons.
• For operat ion wit hin 5.15 ~ 5.25GHz frequency range, it is rest rict ed t o indoor environm ent .
注意 !
依據
低
率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條 經型式認證合格之低 率射頻電機，非經許可，公司
者均不得擅自變更頻率
大 率或變更原設計之特性及 能
商號或使用
第十四條 低 率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安 及干擾合法通信；經發現
有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用
前項合法通信，指依電信規定作業之無線電信 低 率射頻電機須忍
受合法通信或工業 科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾
本機限在不干擾合法電臺與不受被干擾保障條件下於室
減少電磁波影響，請妥適使用
使用
Notices
Changes or m odificat ions not expressly approved by t he part y responsible for com pliance could
void t he user's aut horit y t o operat e t he equipm ent .
This device has been designed for t he WLAN 2.4 GHz net work t hroughout t he EC region and
Swit zerland, wit h rest rict ions in France.
This Class B digit al apparat us com plies wit h Canadian I CES- 003.
Cet appareil num érique de la classe B est conform e à la norm e NMB- 003 du Canada.
Industry Canada Statement
This device com plies wit h RSS- 210 of t he I ndust ry Canada Rules. Operat ion is subj ect t o t he
following t wo condit ions:
228
t his device m ay not cause int erference and
t his device m ust accept any int erference, including int erference t hat m ay cause undesired
operat ion of t he device
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix E Legal Information
This device has been designed t o operat e wit h an ant enna having a m axim um gain of 5dBi.
Ant enna having a higher gain is st rict ly prohibit ed per regulat ions of I ndust ry Canada. The required
ant enna im pedance is 50 ohm s.
To reduce pot ent ial radio int erference t o ot her users, t he ant enna t ype and it s gain should be so
chosen t hat t he EI RP is not m ore t han required for successful com m unicat ion.
IC Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipm ent com plies wit h I C radiat ion exposure lim it s set fort h for an uncont rolled
environm ent . This equipm ent should be inst alled and operat ed wit h m inim um dist ance 20cm
bet ween t he radiat or & your body.
Viewing Certifications
Go t o ht t p: / / www.zyxel.com .
Select your product on t he ZyXEL hom e page t o go t o t hat product 's page.
Select t he cert ificat ion you wish t o view from t his page.
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
ZyXEL warrant s t o t he original end user ( purchaser) t hat t his product is free from any defect s in
m at erial or workm anship for a specific period ( t he Warrant y Period) from t he dat e of purchase. The
Warrant y Period varies by region. Check wit h your vendor and/ or t he aut horized ZyXEL local
dist ribut or for det ails about t he Warrant y Period of t his product . During t he warrant y period, and
upon proof of purchase, should t he product have indicat ions of failure due t o fault y workm anship
and/ or m at erials, ZyXEL will, at it s discret ion, repair or replace t he defect ive product s or
com ponent s wit hout charge for eit her part s or labor, and t o what ever ext ent it shall deem
necessary t o rest ore t he product or com ponent s t o proper operat ing condit ion. Any replacem ent
will consist of a new or re- m anufact ured funct ionally equivalent product of equal or higher value,
and will be solely at t he discret ion of ZyXEL. This warrant y shall not apply if t he product has been
m odified, m isused, t am pered wit h, dam aged by an act of God, or subj ect ed t o abnorm al working
condit ions.
Note
Repair or replacem ent , as provided under t his warrant y, is t he exclusive rem edy of t he purchaser.
This warrant y is in lieu of all ot her warrant ies, express or im plied, including any im plied warrant y of
m erchant abilit y or fit ness for a part icular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for
indirect or consequent ial dam ages of any kind t o t he purchaser.
To obt ain t he services of t his warrant y, cont act your vendor. You m ay also refer t o t he warrant y
policy for t he region in which you bought t he device at ht t p: / / www.zyxel.com / web/
support _warrant y_info.php.
Registration
Regist er your product online t o receive e- m ail not ices of firm ware upgrades and inform at ion at
www.zyxel.com .
NBG6503 User’s Guide
229
Appendix E Legal Information
Open Source Licenses
This product cont ains in part som e free soft ware dist ribut ed under GPL license t erm s and/ or GPL
like licenses. Open source licenses are provided wit h t he firm ware package. You can download t he
lat est firm ware at www.zyxel.com . To obt ain t he source code covered under t hose Licenses, please
cont act support @zyxel.com .t w t o get it .
Regulatory Information
European Union
The following inform at ion applies if you use t he product wit hin t he European Union.
Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE
Directive)
Com pliance I nform at ion for 2.4GHz and 5GHz Wireless Product s Relevant t o t he EU and Ot her
Count ries Following t he EU Direct ive 1999/ 5/ EC ( R&TTE Direct ive)
[ Czech]
ZyXEL t ím t o prohlašuj e, že t ent o zařízení j e ve shodě se základním i požadavky a dalším i
příslušným i ust anovením i sm ěrnice 1999/ 5/ EC.
[ Danish]
Undert egnede ZyXEL erklærer herved, at følgende udst yr udst yr overholder de væsent lige
krav og øvrige relevant e krav i direkt iv 1999/ 5/ EF.
[ Germ an]
Hierm it erklärt ZyXEL, dass sich das Gerät Ausst at t ung in Übereinst im m ung m it den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Best im m ungen der Richt linie
1999/ 5/ EU befindet .
[ Est onian]
Käesolevaga kinnit ab ZyXEL seadm e seadm ed vast avust direkt iivi 1999/ 5/ EÜ põhinõuet ele
j a nim et at ud direkt iivist t ulenevat ele t eist ele asj akohast ele sät et ele.
English
Hereby, ZyXEL declares t hat t his equipm ent is in com pliance wit h t he essent ial
requirem ent s and ot her relevant provisions of Direct ive 1999/ 5/ EC.
[ Spanish]
Por m edio de la present e ZyXEL declara que el equipo cum ple con los requisit os esenciales
y cualesquiera ot ras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Direct iva 1999/ 5/ CE.
[ Greek]
230
Ε Η
Α
Α ZyXEL ∆Η Ω Ε
Ω∆Ε Α Α Η Ε
Α
ε
Ε
π ισ ός
ΦΩ Ε Α
ΧΕ
Ε ∆ Α Α Ε
Η
∆ΗΓ Α
1999/ 5/ ΕC.
[ French]
Par la présent e ZyXEL déclare que l'appareil équipem ent s est conform e aux exigences
essent ielles et aux aut res disposit ions pert inent es de la direct ive 1999/ 5/ EC.
[ I t alian]
Con la present e ZyXEL dichiara che quest o at t rezzat ura è conform e ai requisit i essenziali ed
alle alt re disposizioni pert inent i st abilit e dalla diret t iva 1999/ 5/ CE.
[ Lat vian]
Ar šo ZyXEL deklarē, ka iekārt as at bilst Direkt īvas 1999/ 5/ EK būt iskaj ām prasībām un
cit iem ar t o saist īt aj iem not eikum iem .
[ Lit huanian]
Šiuo ZyXEL deklaruoj a, kad šis įranga at it inka esm inius reikalavim us ir kit as 1999/ 5/ EB
Direkt yvos nuost at as.
[ Dut ch]
Hierbij verklaart ZyXEL dat het t oest el uit rust ing in overeenst em m ing is m et de essent iële
eisen en de andere relevant e bepalingen van richt lij n 1999/ 5/ EC.
[ Malt ese]
Hawnhekk, ZyXEL, j iddikj ara li dan t agħm ir j ikkonform a m al- ħt iġij iet essenzj ali u m a
provvedim ent i oħraj n relevant i li hem m fid- Dirret t iva 1999/ 5/ EC.
[ Hungarian]
Alulírot t , ZyXEL nyilat kozom , hogy a berendezés m egfelel a vonat kozó alapvet õ
követ elm ényeknek és az 1999/ 5/ EK irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
[ Polish]
Niniej szym ZyXEL oświadcza, że sprzęt j est zgodny z zasadniczym i wym ogam i oraz
pozost ałym i st osownym i post anowieniam i Dyrekt ywy 1999/ 5/ EC.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix E Legal Information
[ Port uguese]
ZyXEL declara que est e equipam ent o est á conform e com os requisit os essenciais e out ras
disposições da Direct iva 1999/ 5/ EC.
[ Slovenian]
ZyXEL izj avlj a, da j e t a oprem a v skladu z bist venim i zaht evam i in ost alim i relevant nim i
določili direkt ive 1999/ 5/ EC.
[ Slovak]
ZyXEL t ým t o vyhlasuj e, že zariadenia spĺňa základné požiadavky a všet ky príslušné
ust anovenia Sm ernice 1999/ 5/ EC.
[ Finnish]
ZyXEL vakuut t aa t ät en et t ä lait t eet t yyppinen lait e on direkt iivin 1999/ 5/ EY oleellist en
vaat im ust en j a sit ä koskevien direkt iivin m uiden eht oj en m ukainen.
[ Swedish]
Härm ed int ygar ZyXEL at t denna ut rust ning st år I överensst äm m else m ed de väsent liga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevant a best äm m elser som fram går av direkt iv 1999/ 5/ EC.
[ Bulgarian]
С
[ I celandic]
Hér m eð lýsir, ZyXEL því yfir að þessi búnaður er í sam ræm i við grunnkröfur og önnur
viðeigandi ákvæði t ilskipunar 1999/ 5/ EC.
[ Norwegian]
Erklærer herved ZyXEL at det t e ut st yret er I sam svar m ed de grunnleggende kravene og
andre relevant e best em m elser I direkt iv 1999/ 5/ EF.
[ Rom anian]
Prin prezent a, ZyXEL declară că acest echipam ent est e în conform it at e cu cerinţele
esenţiale şi alt e prevederi relevant e ale Direct ivei 1999/ 5/ EC.
я
я
ZyXEL
,ч
1999/ 5/ C.
National Restrictions
This product m ay be used in all EU count ries ( and ot her count ries following t he EU direct ive 1999/
5/ EC) wit hout any lim it at ion except for t he count ries m ent ioned below:
Ce produit peut êt re ut ilisé dans t ous les pays de l’UE ( et dans t ous les pays ayant t ransposés la
direct ive 1999/ 5/ CE) sans aucune lim it at ion, except é pour les pays m ent ionnés ci- dessous:
Quest o prodot t o è ut ilizzabile in t ut t e i paesi EU ( ed in t ut t i gli alt ri paesi che seguono le diret t ive EU
1999/ 5/ EC) senza nessuna lim it azione, eccet t o per i paesii m enzionat i di seguit o:
Das Produkt kann in allen EU St aat en ohne Einschränkungen eingeset zt werden ( sowie in anderen
St aat en die der EU Direkt ive 1995/ 5/ CE folgen) m it Außnahm e der folgenden aufgeführt en
St aat en:
I n t he m aj orit y of t he EU and ot her European count ries, t he 2, 4- and 5- GHz bands have been
m ade available for t he use of wireless local area net works ( LANs) . Lat er in t his docum ent you will
find an overview of count ries inwhich addit ional rest rict ions or requirem ent s or bot h are applicable.
The requirem ent s for any count ry m ay evolve. ZyXEL recom m ends t hat you check wit h t he local
aut horit ies for t he lat est st at us of t heir nat ional regulat ions for bot h t he 2,4- and 5- GHz wireless
LANs.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
231
Appendix E Legal Information
The following count ries have rest rict ions and/ or requirem ent s in addit ion t o t hose given in t he t able
labeled “ Overview of Regulat ory Requirem ent s for Wireless LANs” : .
Overview of Regulat ory Requirem ent s for Wireless LANs
Frequency Band ( MHz)
Max Power Level
I ndoor ONLY
I ndoor and Out door
( EI RP) 1 ( m W)
2400- 2483.5
100
5150- 5350
200
5470- 5725
1000
Belgium
The Belgian I nst it ut e for Post al Services and Telecom m unicat ions ( BI PT) m ust be not ified of any
out door wireless link having a range exceeding 300 m et ers. Please check ht t p: / / www.bipt .be for
m ore det ails.
Draadloze verbindingen voor buit engebruik en m et een reikwij dt e van m eer dan 300 m et er dienen
aangem eld t e worden bij het Belgisch I nst it uut voor post dienst en en t elecom m unicat ie ( BI PT) . Zie
ht t p: / / www.bipt .be voor m eer gegevens.
Les liaisons sans fil pour une ut ilisat ion en ext érieur d’une dist ance supérieure à 300 m èt res
doivent êt re not ifiées à l’I nst it ut Belge des services Post aux et des Télécom m unicat ions ( I BPT) .
Visit ez ht t p: / / www.ibpt .be pour de plus am ples dét ails.
Denm ark
I n Denm ark, t he band 5150 - 5350 MHz is also allowed for out door usage.
I Danm ark m å frekvensbåndet 5150 - 5350 også anvendes udendørs.
France
For 2.4 GHz, t he out put power is rest rict ed t o 10 m W EI RP when t he product is used out doors in t he
band 2454 - 2483.5 MHz. There are no rest rict ions when used indoors or in ot her part s of t he 2.4
GHz band. Check ht t p: / / www.arcep.fr/ for m ore det ails.
Pour la bande 2.4 GHz, la puissance est lim it ée à 10 m W en p.i.r.e. pour les équipem ent s ut ilisés en
ext érieur dans la bande 2454 - 2483.5 MHz. I l n'y a pas de rest rict ions pour des ut ilisat ions en
int érieur ou dans d'aut res part ies de la bande 2.4 GHz. Consult ez ht t p: / / www.arcep.fr/ pour de plus
am ples dét ails.
R&TTE 1999/ 5/ EC
WLAN 2.4 – 2.4835 GHz
I EEE 802.11 b/ g/ n
Locat ion
Frequency Range( GHz)
Power ( EI RP)
I ndoor ( No rest rict ions)
2.4 – 2.4835
100m W ( 20dBm )
Out door
2.4 – 2.454
100m W ( 20dBm )
2.454 – 2.4835
10m W ( 10dBm )
I t aly
This product m eet s t he Nat ional Radio I nt erface and t he requirem ent s specified in t he Nat ional
Frequency Allocat ion Table for I t aly. Unless t his wireless LAN product is operat ing wit hin t he
232
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Appendix E Legal Information
boundaries of t he owner's propert y, it s use requires a “ general aut horizat ion.” Please check ht t p: / /
www.sviluppoeconom ico.gov.it / for m ore det ails.
Quest o prodot t o è conform e alla specifiche di I nt erfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispet t a il Piano
Nazionale di ripart izione delle frequenze in I t alia. Se non viene inst allat o all 'int erno del proprio
fondo, l'ut ilizzo di prodot t i Wireless LAN richiede una “Aut orizzazione Generale”. Consult are ht t p: / /
www.sviluppoeconom ico.gov.it / per m aggiori det t agli.
Lat via
The out door usage of t he 2.4 GHz band requires an aut horizat ion from t he Elect ronic
Com m unicat ions Office. Please check ht t p: / / www.esd.lv for m ore det ails.
2.4 GHz frekvenèu j oslas izm ant oðanai ârpus t elpâm nepiecieðam a at ïauj a no Elekt ronisko sakaru
direkcij as. Vairâk inform âcij as: ht t p: / / www.esd.lv.
Not es:
1. Alt hough Norway, Swit zerland and Liecht enst ein are not EU m em ber st at es, t he EU Direct ive
1999/ 5/ EC has also been im plem ent ed in t hose count ries.
2. The regulat ory lim it s for m axim um out put power are specified in EI RP. The EI RP level ( in dBm ) of
a device can be calculat ed by adding t he gain of t he ant enna used( specified in dBi) t o t he out put
power available at t he connect or ( specified in dBm ) .
List of national codes
COUNTRY
ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE
COUNTRY
ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE
Aust ria
AT
Malt a
MT
Belgium
BE
Net herlands
NL
Cyprus
CY
Poland
PL
Czech Republic
CR
Port ugal
PT
Denm ark
DK
Slovakia
SK
Est onia
EE
Slovenia
SI
Finland
FI
Spain
ES
France
FR
Sweden
SE
Germ any
DE
Unit ed Kingdom
GB
Greece
GR
I celand
IS
Hungary
HU
Liecht enst ein
LI
I reland
IE
Nor way
NO
I t aly
IT
Swit zerland
CH
Lat via
LV
Bulgaria
BG
Lit huania
LT
Rom ania
RO
Luxem bourg
LU
Turkey
TR
Safety Warnings
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do NOT use t his product near wat er, for exam ple, in a wet basem ent or near a swim m ing pool.
Do NOT expose your device t o dam pness, dust or corrosive liquids.
Do NOT st ore t hings on t he device.
Do NOT inst all, use, or ser vice t his device during a t hunderst orm . There is a r em ot e risk of elect ric shock from light ning.
Connect ONLY suit able accessories t o t he device.
Do NOT open t he device or unit . Opening or rem oving covers can expose you t o dangerous high volt age point s or ot her risks. ONLY
qualified service personnel should service or disassem ble t his device. Please cont act your vendor for furt her inform at ion.
Make sure t o connect t he cables t o t he correct port s.
Place connect ing cables carefully so t hat no one will st ep on t hem or st um ble over t hem .
Always disconnect all cables from t his device befor e servicing or disassem bling.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
233
Appendix E Legal Information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Use ONLY an appropriat e power adapt or or cord for your device.
Connect t he power adapt or or cord t o t he right supply volt age ( for exam ple, 110V AC in Nort h Am er ica or 230V AC in Europe) .
Do NOT allow anyt hing t o rest on t he power adapt or or cord and do NOT place t he product where anyone can walk on t he power
adapt or or cord.
Do NOT use t he device if t he power adapt or or cor d is dam aged as it m ight cause elect rocut ion.
I f t he power adapt or or cord is dam aged, rem ove it fr om t he power out let .
Do NOT at t em pt t o repair t he power adapt or or cord. Cont act your local vendor t o order a new one.
Do not use t he device out side, and m ake sure all t he connect ions are indoors. There is a rem ot e risk of elect ric shock from light ning.
Do NOT obst ruct t he device vent ilat ion slot s, as insufficient airflow m ay harm your device.
Ant enna Warning! This device m eet s ETSI and FCC cert ificat ion requirem ent s when using t he included ant enna( s) . Only use t he
included ant enna( s) .
I f you wall m ount your device, m ake sure t hat no elect rical lines, gas or wat er pipes w ill be dam aged.
Your product is m arked w it h t his sym bol, which is know n as t he WEEE m ark. WEEE st ands for Wast e Elect ronics and Elect rical
Equipm ent . I t m eans t hat used elect rical and elect ronic product s should not be m ixed w it h general wast e. Used elect rical and
elect ronic equipm ent should be t reat ed separat ely.
234
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Index
Index
Act iveX 134
Address Assignm ent 100
Advanced Encrypt ion St andard
See AES.
AES 217
alt ernat ive subnet m ask not at ion 173
ant enna
direct ional 221
gain 221
om ni- direct ional 221
AP 15
AP ( access point ) 211
AP Mode
m enu 70
st at us screen 68
AP+ Bridge 15
cert ificat ions 227
not ices 228
viewing 229
Channel 59, 69
channel 84, 211
int erference 211
Configurat ion
rest ore 160
cont ent filt ering 133
by keyword ( in URL) 133
by web feat ure 133
Cookies 135
copyright 227
CPU usage 60, 69
CTS ( Clear t o Send) 212
Aut o- bridge 108
Daylight saving 158
Bandwidt h m anagem ent
overview 137
priorit y 139
services 143
Basic Service Set , See BSS 209
Bit Torrent 144
Bridge/ Repeat er 15
bridged APs, securit y 86
BSS 209
DDNS 123
see also Dynam ic DNS
service providers 123
DHCP 39, 113
DHCP server
see also Dynam ic Host Configurat ion Prot ocol
DHCP server 110, 113
DHCP t able 39
DHCP client inform at ion
DHCP st at us
disclaim er 227
DNS 115
DNS Server 100
DNS server 115
CA 215
Cert ificat e Aut horit y
See CA.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
docum ent at ion
relat ed 2
Dom ain Nam e Syst em 115
Dom ain Nam e Syst em . See DNS.
duplex set t ing 60, 69
Dynam ic DNS 123
235
Index
Dynam ic Host Configurat ion Prot ocol 113
dynam ic WEP key exchange 216
DynDNS 123
I ANA 178
DynDNS see also DDNS 123
I BSS 209
EAP Aut hent icat ion 215
encrypt ion 85, 217
key 85
WPA com pat ible 85
I GMP 101
see also I nt ernet Group Mult icast Prot ocol
version
I GMP version 101
I ndependent Basic Service Set
See I BSS 209
init ializat ion vect or ( I V) 217
ESS 210
I nt ernet Assigned Num bers Aut horit y
See I ANA 178
ESSI D 169
I nt ernet Group Mult icast Prot ocol 101
Ext ended Service Set , See ESS 210
I P Address 111, 118, 119
I P alias 110
I P Pool 113
FCC int erference st at em ent 227
File Transfer Program 143
Firewall
I CMP packet s 131
Firm ware upload 158
file ext ension
using HTTP
firm ware version 59, 68
Java 134
fragm ent at ion t hreshold 212
LAN 109
I P pool set up 110
FTP. see also File Transfer Program 143
LAN overview 109
LAN set up 109
LAN TCP/ I P 110
Language 161
Link t ype 60, 69
General wireless LAN screen 86
Local Area Net work 109
Guide
Quick St art 2
MAC 90
hidden node 211
MAC address 84, 100
cloning 100
HTTP 143
MAC address filt er 84
Hyper Text Transfer Prot ocol 143
MAC address filt ering 90
MAC filt er 90
236
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Index
m anaging t he device
good habit s 16
using t he web configurat or. See web configurat or.
using t he wireless swit ch.
using t he WPS. See WPS.
MBSSI D 15
Media access cont rol 90
PPPoE 103
dial- up connect ion
PPTP 105
pream ble m ode 213
product regist rat ion 229
PSK 217
Mem ory usage 60, 69
Message I nt egrit y Check ( MI C) 217
m ode 15
Mult icast 101
I GMP 101
NAT 117, 118, 178
how it works 117
overview 117
see also Net work Address Translat ion
NAT Traversal 147
Navigat ion Panel 61, 70
navigat ion panel 61, 70
Net work Address Translat ion 117, 118
Qualit y of Service ( QoS) 93
Quick St art Guide 2
RADI US 214
m essage t ypes 214
m essages 214
shared secret key 215
regist rat ion
product 229
relat ed docum ent at ion 2
Rem ot e m anagem ent
and NAT 145
lim it at ions 145
syst em t im eout 146
Reset but t on 35
operat ing m ode 15
Reset t he device 35
ot her docum ent at ion 2
Rest ore configurat ion 160
Roam ing 91
RTS ( Request To Send) 212
t hreshold 211, 212
RTS/ CTS Threshold 84, 91, 92
P2P 144
Pairwise Mast er Key ( PMK) 217, 219
peer- t o- peer 144
Point- t o- Point Prot ocol over Et hernet 103
Point- t o- Point Tunneling Prot ocol 105
safet y warnings 233
Pool Size 114
Scheduling 96
Port forwarding 119
default server 118
local server 119
Service and port num bers 132, 142
Service Set I Dent ificat ion 53, 86
port speed 60, 69
Service Set I Dent it y. See SSI D.
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Service Set 53, 86
237
Index
Session I nit iat ed Prot ocol 143
SI P 143
SSI D 53, 59, 69, 84, 86
WAN ( Wide Area Net work) 99
St at ic DHCP 114
WAN advanced 108
St at ic Rout e 125
WAN MAC address 100
St at us 58
warrant y 229
not e 229
subnet 171
Subnet Mask 111, 112
subnet m ask 172
subnet t ing 174
Web Configurat or
how t o access 31
Overview 31
web configurat or 15
Sum m ary
DHCP t able 39
Packet st at ist ics 40
Wireless st at ion st at us 41
WEP encrypt ion 88
Syst em General Set up 155
WEP key 88
Syst em rest art 161
Wi- Fi Prot ect ed Access 217
Web Proxy 135
WEP Encrypt ion 89, 90
Wireless associat ion list 41
wireless channel 169
wireless client WPA supplicant s 218
wireless LAN 169
TCP/ I P configurat ion 113
wireless LAN scheduling 96
Tem poral Key I nt egrit y Prot ocol ( TKI P) 217
Wireless net work
basic guidelines 83
channel 84
encrypt ion 85
exam ple 83
MAC address filt er 84
overview 83
securit y 84
SSI D 84
Tim e set t ing 157
t rigger port 120
Trigger port forwarding 120
exam ple 122
process 122
Universal Plug and Play 147
Applicat ion 147
Securit y issues 148
UPnP 147
Wireless securit y 84
overview 84
t ype 84
wireless securit y 169, 213
wireless swit ch 15
URL Keyword Blocking 135
Wireless t ut orial 73
WPS 73
User Nam e 124
Wizard set up 21
VoI P 143
VPN 105
238
WLAN
int erference 211
securit y param et ers 220
WLAN 2.4G 41
WLAN 5G 41
World Wide Web 143
WPA 217
NBG6503 User’s Guide
Index
key caching 218
pre- aut hent icat ion 218
user aut hent icat ion 218
vs WPA- PSK 217
wireless client supplicant 218
wit h RADI US applicat ion exam ple 218
WPA com pat ible 85
WPA2 217
user aut hent icat ion 218
vs WPA2- PSK 217
wireless client supplicant 218
wit h RADI US applicat ion exam ple 218
WPA2- Pre- Shared Key 217
WPA2- PSK 217
applicat ion exam ple 219
WPA- PSK 217
applicat ion exam ple 219
WPS 15
WWW 143
Xbox Live 144
NBG6503 User’s Guide
239
Index
240
NBG6503 User’s Guide

---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract, Print high-res
Author                          : ZT01650
Create Date                     : 2013:04:26 11:38:32Z
Modify Date                     : 2013:05:28 22:25:03+08:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Book.book
Creator                         : ZT01650
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 9.0
Metadata Date                   : 2013:05:28 22:25:03+08:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 9.5.2 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:69b401b5-e551-419d-beec-8ddfd340c1f6
Instance ID                     : uuid:b2a94ea2-3b94-4e7a-9e92-2c39a5bd22ee
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 230

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools